Rotary Actuators - PHD

INDEX:
ROTARY ACTUATORS Series RL

Pages 3A-1 to 3A-17
SERIES RL, RA, RI, RF, MINIATURE, Series RA

Pages 3B-1 to 3B-15
AIR/OIL TANDEM, AND MULTI-POSITION
Miniature
(Series 0180 & 0183)
Exceptional Selection of Models, Sizes, Options, and Price Range Pages 3C-1 to 3C-6
Series 1000-8000
NEW!
Pages 3C-8 to 3C-12
Air/Oil Tandem
Pages 3C-13 to 3C-19
-INDEX
SERIES RI Multi-Position
ROTARY ACTUATORS Pages 3C-20 to 3C-28
Engineering Data
SERIES RF Plumbing Schematics

ROTARY ACTUATORS Pages 3C-32 and 3C-33
Start-up Procedure
Pages 3C-34
Options
Series RI
SERIES 2000-8000 Pages 3D-1 to 3D-26
AIR/OIL TANDEM
Series RF
Pages 3D-27 to 3D-43
SERIES 2000-8000
MULTI-POSITION
ROTARY ACTUATORS
1000-8000 MULTI-POSITION
ACTUATORS
MINIATURE
SERIES RA SERIES RL ROTARY
ROTARY ACTUATORS ROTARY ACTUATORS ACTUATORS
3-i
SOLUTIONS FOR (800) 624-8511
INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION CAT-03 www.phdinc.com/products/rotaryactuators
ROTARY ACTUATORS
SERIES RL ROTARY ACTUATORS
PHD Series RL Rotary Actuators cover a wide range of sizes

from miniature 12 mm bore units to 63 mm bore units. These
actuators have a very high torque to envelope ratio and are capable
of very high rotation velocities. Built-in optional shock absorbers
provide smooth deceleration of external loads.
Sizes: 8
Operating Media: Pneumatic, 150 psi [10 bar] maximum
Maximum Torque Output: 4.4 to 544 in-lb [.49 to 61.5 Nm]
SERIES RA ROTARY ACTUATORS
PHD Series RA Rotary Actuators have zero backlash at ends of

3-INDEX
rotation providing precise rotary positioning. Large shafts, bearings,

and rack provide high load-stopping capacity, exceptional radial and
axial bearing load ratings, and long unit life. Built-in optional shock
absorbers provide smooth deceleration of external loads.
Sizes: 5
Maximum Torque Output: 14 to 228 in-lb [1.6 to 25.8 Nm]
MINIATURE ROTARY ACTUATORS

SERIES 018075, 018050, & 0180375
PHD Miniature Rotary Actuators are lightweight, compact

units for small part orientation or part turn over. Adjustable stops
provide 0° to 180° rotation for pneumatic use. Also available in 3
Position and Air/Oil Tandem versions.
Sizes: 2
Maximum Torque Output: 9.75 to 33 in-lb [1.1 to 3.7 Nm]
ROTARY ACTUATORS
SERIES 1000-8000
Series 1000-8000 Rotary Actuators are a rugged line for

pneumatic or hydraulic service. These units have a wide range of
rotations, options, and shaft configurations allowing them to be
configured for most rotary applications. Standard rotations range up
to 450° with torques to 31,800 in-lb.
Sizes: 8
Operating Media: Pneumatic, 150 psi [10 bar] maximum,
Hydraulic, 1500 psi [100 bar] maximum
Maximum Torque Output: 57 to 31,800 in-lb [6.4 to 3595 Nm]
3-ii
(800) 624-8511 SOLUTIONS FOR
www.phdinc.com/products/rotaryactuators CAT-03 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
AIR/OIL TANDEM ROTARY ACTUATORS
SERIES 2000-8000
Air/Oil Tandem Rotary Actuators provide the smooth control

of hydraulics with the simplicity of pneumatics. One end of the
actuator is a closed loop hydraulic control member. The other
provides pneumatic power to the racks.
Sizes: 4
Maximum Torque Output: 57 to 1,590 in-lb [6.4 to 179.8 Nm]
-INDEX
MULTI-POSITION ROTARY ACTUATORS
SERIES 2000-8000
Multi-Position Rotary Actuators can yield three, four, or five

rotary shaft stop positions. Each position is located by means of
positive internal stops.
Sizes: 4
Operating Media: Pneumatic, 150 psi [10 bar] maximum,
Hydraulic, 1500 psi [100 bar] maximum
Maximum Torque Output: Ranges from 57 to 15,900 in-lb
[6.4 to 1797.9 Nm]
SERIES RI ROTARY ACTUATORS
Series RI Rotary Actuators incorporate internal air passages

within the rotary pinion manifold to allow pneumatic coupling to
other devices without tubing. This protection from severed or
damaged air lines eliminates downtime.
Sizes: 3
Maximum Torque Output: Ranges from 32 to 414 in-lb at 87psi
[3.6 to 46.8 Nm at 6 bar]
SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATORS
Series RF Rotary Actuators feature a low profile body design

with a large output mounting hub to cover a wide range of
applications. This rack and pinion design features high tensile steel
NEW!
racks and a one-piece pinion/output hub providing durability and
long life.
Sizes: 3
Maximum Torque Output: Ranges from 7 to 67 in-lb at 100 psi [0.8
to 7.7 Nm at 7 bar]
3-iii
INDEX:
ROTARY ACTUATORS Ordering Data
Page 3A-2
SERIES RL
Benefits
Page 3A-3
Dimensions
Pages 3A-4 and 3A-5
Low Cost, High Torque, Compact Size
Engineering Data
Pages 3A-6 and 3A-7
Options
Pages 3A-8 to 3A-12
Accessories
3A
Page 3A-13
Rotary Actuator
Selection
Pages 3A-14 to 3A-15
Application Example
Page 3A-16 to 3A-17
3A-1
INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION CAT-03 www.phdinc.com/rl
3A
3A-2
SWITCH READY MISCELLANEOUS
TO ORDER SPECIFY:
E - Hall Effect magnets for GX - Mounting holes in Positions 3 & 4
Product, Series, Type, Design No., SHOCK ABSORBER
BORE SIZE Series 5360 Switch (Positions 2 & 3 standard)
www.phdinc.com/rl
(800) 624-8511
Bore Size, Angle of Rotation,
12 mm NB - Shock both directions I - Magnetoresistive Q13 - Double shaft extension
and Options.
16 mm NC - Shock counterclockwise magnets for Series U4 - Port Position 2
20 mm NW - Shock clockwise 5360 Switch U6 - Port Position 3
PRODUCT
25 mm GS - Shock ready both directions M- Reed magnets for Series U8 - Port Position 4
R - Rotary Actuator GT - Shock ready counterclockwise 5360 Switch
32 mm -U options apply only to caps with angle
40 mm GU - Shock ready clockwise Switches must be ordered adjustment or shock absorber options.
TYPE 50 mm Shock absorber options not available separately. See notes Port Positions on all other caps are in
S - 150 psi [10 bar] Air Max. 63 mm on 12 mm, 16 mm, and 20 mm units. 2, 3, and page 3A-10. Position 5.
R L S 1 40 x 180 - NC - BW - AW - E - Q13
CAT-03
SERIES DESIGN NO. ANGLE OF ROTATION CUSHION CONTROL ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
L - Medium Duty 1 - Imperial 45°, 90°, 135°, 180°, DB - Cushion both directions AB - 45° Angle Adjustment both directions
5 - Metric 225°, 270° DC - Cushion counterclockwise AC - 45° Angle Adjustment counterclockwise
DW- Cushion clockwise AW- 45° Angle Adjustment clockwise
NOTES: BB - Shock Pad both directions
1) Shock pad and/or angle adjustment options not available in BC - Shock Pad counterclockwise SHOCK ABSORBER CHART
the same direction with cushion or shock absorber options. BW - Shock Pad clockwise BORE PHD SHOCK
2) -E option not available on 12 mm and 16 mm units. Cushions and shock pads not SIZE ABSORBER NO.
3) -M option not available on 12 mm units and a minimum of available on same end of actuator. 25 mm 60335-04
90° of rotation required on 16 mm units. Shock pad options not available 32 mm 60335-05
4) For keyless hub adaptor kits, see page 3A-13.
ORDERING DATA: SERIES RL ROTARY ACTUATORS
on 12 mm units. 40 mm 60335-06
50 mm 60335-06
63 mm 60335-07
SOLUTIONS FOR
INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
BENEFITS: SERIES RL ROTARY ACTUATORS
BENEFITS
■ Series RL Rotary Actuators are available in 8 sizes and
6 standard rotations with torques ranging up to 360 in-lb at
100 psi [41 Nm at 7 bar] to suit a wide range of applications.
■ Series RL Rotary Actuators provide a very high torque to

envelope ratio.
■ Free-floating pistons with pressure and wear compensating

seals ensure minimum friction and long life.
■ Acetal pistons and rack bearings eliminate metal-to-metal

contact for smooth operation, long life and breakaway pressure
less than 5 psi [0.35 bar].
■ Sealed ball bearings provide smooth operation and reliability.
3A
■ The high-strength alloy steel rack and one-piece pinion shaft
are designed and tested to operate for a minimum of 5 million
maintenance-free cycles. SPECIFICATIONS 12 mm-63 mm
PISTON SEALS One Block Vee per Piston
■ Series RL Rotary Actuators are available in both imperial and PISTONS Free Floating, Acetal
metric versions for worldwide markets. PINION SHAFTS One Piece Alloy Steel
RACKS Alloy Steel
■ Optional built-in adjustable cushions reduce shock at end of END CAPS Clear Anodized Aluminum
rotation and increase load stopping capacity. BODY Hardcoated Aluminum
BEARINGS Two Steel Ball Bearings
■ Optional 45° angle adjustments make it easy to adjust to
specific rotation requirements. This provides a total range of PORTS NPT [BSP]
actuator rotations from 0° to 270°. BREAKAWAY PRESSURE 5 psi [0.35 bar]
LUBRICATION Permanent for Non-Lube Air
■ Optional built-in hydraulic shock absorbers provide smooth WORKING PRESSURE 150 psi [10 bar] Air Max.
deceleration of attached loads. STANDARD ROTATIONS 45°, 90°, 135°, 180°, 225°, 270°
OPTIONS Cushions, Shock Pads,
■ Optional keyless hub adaptors available for easy and secure Shock Absorber,
mounting of interface components to the actuator output shaft. Magnets for Proximity Switches,
These adaptors allow precise angular positioning of mounted
Angle Adjustments, Mounting Surface,
devices at any required angle.
Double Pinion Shaft
■ PHD Miniature Proximity Switches mount easily into slots in ACCESSORIES Keyless Hub Adaptor
the actuator's body for interfacing with an electrical controller.
Units can be specified for use with PHD’s Miniature Reed, Hall
Effect, or Magnetoresistive Switches.
3A-3
DIMENSIONS: SERIES RL ROTARY ACTUATORS
J SLOT FOR
J/2 OPTIONAL SWITCH
1
G PORT 5
-Q13 SPECIFIED
Q WHEN ORDERING
QA 2 4
B K
EE
P
U x .067 [1.7] DP L 3
T
E SQ
R KEY
RLS112 - SEE FIGURE 1 BELOW
RLS116, RLS120, RLS125 - WOODRUFF KEY
ALL OTHERS USE SQUARE/RECTANGULAR KEY
H MTG THREAD
M 4X FRONT
3A
4X BOTTOM
M/2 (POS 2 & 3 ONLY)
.170
C/2 FIGURE 1
N/2 FOR RLS112 ONLY
C N
.394
A F
NOTES:
1) CIRCLED NUMBERS INDICATE PORT MOUNTING SURFACE POSITION
2) NUMBERS IN [ ] ARE FOR METRIC UNITS AND ARE IN mm
3) KEYWAY SHOWN AT MID ROTATION
3A-4 All dimensions are reference only unless specifically toleranced.

www.phdinc.com/rl CAT-03 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
DIMENSIONS: SERIES RL ROTARY ACTUATORS
BORE SIZE NOMINAL ROTATION A B C D E EE F G PORT H

45° OR 90° 2.047 [52.0]
1.201 1.024 .448 .964 .482 .374 10-32 THD 4-40 x .224
12 mm 135° OR 180° 2.579 [65.5]
[30.5] [26.0] [11.5] [24.5] [12.25] [9.5] [M5 x 0.8] [M3 x 0.5 x 6.0]
225° OR 270° 3.110 [79.0]
45° OR 90° 2.461 [62.5]
1.378 1.142 .530 1.082 .541 .374 10-32 THD 4-40 x .224
16 mm 135° OR 180° 3.091 [78.5]
[35.0] [29.0] [13.5] [27.5] [13.75] [9.5] [M5 x 0.8] [M3 x 0.5 x 6.0]
225° OR 270° 3.563 [90.5]
45° OR 90° 2.854 [72.5]
1.634 1.300 .532 1.260 .630 .374 10-32 THD 6-32 x .276
20 mm 135° OR 180° 3.248 [82.5]
[41.5] [33.0] [13.5] [32.0] [16.0] [9.5] [M5 x 0.8] [M4 x 0.7 x 8.0]
225° OR 270° 3.957 [100.5]
45° OR 90° 3.504 [89.0]
1.811 1.556 .623 1.516 .758 .473 1/8 NPT 10-24 x .380
25 mm 135° OR 180° 3.976 [101.0]
[46.0] [39.5] [16.0] [38.5] [19.25] [12.0] [1/8 BSP] [M5 x 0.8 x 10.0]
225° OR 270° 4.921 [125.0]
45° OR 90° 3.720 [94.5]
2.244 1.772 .788 1.732 .866 .473 1/8 NPT 10-24 x .380
32 mm 135° OR 180° 4.705 [119.5]
3A
[57.0] [45.0] [20.0] [44.0] [22.0] [12.0] [1/8 BSP] [M5 x 0.8 x 10.0]
225° OR 270° 5.866 [149.0]
45° OR 90° 4.626 [117.5]
2.579 2.126 .866 2.086 1.043 .473 1/8 NPT 1/4-20 x .500
40 mm 135° OR 180° 5.925 [150.5]
[65.5] [54.0] [22.0] [53.0] [26.5] [12.0] [1/8 BSP] [M6 x 1.0 x 12.0]
225° OR 270° 7.500 [190.0]
45° OR 90° 5.295 [134.5]
3.248 2.540 1.004 2.480 1.240 .650 1/4 NPT 5/16-18 x .625
50 mm 135° OR 180° 6.850 [174.0]
[82.5] [64.5] [25.5] [63.0] [31.5] [16.5] [1/4 BSP] [M8 x 1.25 x 16.0]
225° OR 270° 8.661 [220.0]
45° OR 90° 6.535 [166.0]
3.858 3.168 1.279 2.972 1.486 .650 1/4 NPT 5/16-18 x .625
63 mm 135° OR 180° 8.504 [216.0]
[98.0] [80.5] [32.5] [75.5] [37.75] [16.5] [1/4 BSP] [M8 x 1.25 x 16.0]
225° OR 270° 10.846 [275.5]
BORE SIZE J K L M N P [h8] Q QA R T U

1.062 .866 .335 1.378 .630 .1875 .630 SEE FIGURE 1 .233 .7485
12 mm —
[27.0] [22.0] [8.5] [35.0] [16.0] [6.0] [16.0] [2.0 SQ x 10.0] [5.9] [19.0]
1.142 1.004 .373 1.536 .650 .2495 .748 .312 203 WOODRUFF .289 .8666
16 mm
[29.0] [25.5] [9.5] [39.0] [16.5] [8.0] [19.0] [7.92] [3.0 SQ x 14.0] [7.3] [22.0]
1.102 1.220 .354 1.516 .906 .3125 .748 .437 204 WOODRUFF .349 .8666
20 mm
[28.0] [31.0] [9.0] [38.5] [23.0] [8.0] [19.0] [11.1] [3.0 SQ x 14.0] [8.9] [22.0]
1.378 1.397 .443 1.968 1.182 .3745 1.004 .437 204 WOODRUFF .292 1.0241
25 mm
[35.0] [35.5] [11.25] [50.0] [30.0] [10.0] [25.5] [11.1] [3.0 SQ x 16.0] [7.4] [26.0]
1.614 1.850 .631 2.204 1.260 .4995 1.260 1/8 SQ x 3/4 .488 1.2603
32 mm —
[41.0] [47.0] [16.0] [56.0] [32.0] [14.0] [32.0] [5.0 SQ x 20.0] [12.4] [32.0]
2.028 2.146 .650 2.874 1.534 .6245 1.496 3/16 SQ x 1.00 .476 1.3785
40 mm —
[51.5] [54.5] [16.5] [73.0] [39.0] [16.0] [38.0] [5.0 SQ x 25.0] [12.1] [35.0]
2.480 2.677 .670 3.308 1.850 .7495 1.752 3/16 SQ x 1-1/4 .725 1.6540
50 mm —
[63.0] [68.0] [17.0] [84.0] [47.0] [20.0] [44.5] [6.0 SQ x 30.0] [18.4] [42.0]
2.716 3.248 .945 3.544 2.204 .9995 2.007 1/4 SQ x 1-3/8 .849 2.1659
63 mm —
[69.0] [82.5] [24.0] [90.0] [56.0] [30.0] [51.0] [8.0 x 7.0 x 36.0 RECT] [21.6] [55.0]
Numbers in [ ] are for metric units and are in mm.
All dimensions are reference only unless specifically toleranced. 3A-5

ENGINEERING DATA: SERIES RL ROTARY ACTUATORS
RL SPECIFICATIONS
BORE GEAR RACKS PISTON DIAMETER PISTON AREA DISPLACEMENT
SIZE 45°-270° in mm in2 mm2 in /DEG. ROT.
3
mm3/DEG. ROT.
12 mm 1 .47 12 .18 112.90 .0005 8.19
16 mm 1 .63 16 .31 201.29 .001 16.39
20 mm 1 .79 20 .49 314.19 .002 32.77
25 mm 1 .98 25 .76 490.32 .004 65.55
32 mm 1 1.26 32 1.25 804.19 .008 131.10
40 mm 1 1.58 40 1.95 1256.64 .017 278.58
50 mm 1 1.97 50 3.04 1963.48 .032 524.39
63 mm 1 2.48 63 4.83 3117.41 .063 1032.38
PRESSURE AND BREAKAWAY RATINGS BEARING LOADS TABLE

All Series RL Rotary Actuators have a maximum pressure
AXIAL RADIAL DISTANCE
rating of 150 psi [10 bar] with a 5 psi [0.3 bar] breakaway pressure.
BEARING LOAD BEARING LOAD BETWEEN
3A
They are for pneumatic application only.

BORE CAPACITY CAPACITY BEARINGS
SIZE lb N lb N in mm
OPERATING TEMPERATURES 12 mm 26 115 165 734 .65 16.6
Standard Series RL Rotary Actuators are recommended for use
16 mm 39 173 230 1023 .73 18.6
in temperatures from -20° to +180°F [-28° to +82°C]. Consult PHD
for operation at temperatures outside this range. 20 mm 39 173 230 1023 .89 22.6
25 mm 110 489 320 1423 1.11 28.1
32 mm 160 711 390 1734 1.28 32.6
LUBRICATION 40 mm 184 818 420 1868 1.60 40.6
All units are pre-lubricated at assembly for operation with
50 mm 285 1267 660 2935 1.93 49.1
non-lubricated air. Service life can be extended by periodic
lubrication of the rack and pinion with high grade bearing grease 63 mm 450 2001 925 4114 2.52 64.1
and by using lubricated air.
ANGLE OF ROTATION
Standard angles of rotation are 45°, 90°, 135°, 180°, 225°, and
270°. Consult PHD for other rotation requirements. All units with
optional angle adjustments provide 90° of total angle adjustment.
ROTATIONAL TOLERANCE
The total rotational tolerance of the Series RL Rotary Actuator
is +10°, -0° on specified rotation.
BACKLASH
MAXIMUM
BORE SIZE BACKLASH
12 mm & 16 mm 1° 30'
20 mm & 25 mm 1° 0'
32 mm & 40 mm 0° 45'
50 mm & 63 mm 0° 30'
ROTATIONAL VELOCITY
MAXIMUM
BORE SIZE VELOCITY
12 mm & 16 mm 180°/.030 sec
20 mm, 25 mm, & 32 mm 180°/.050 sec
40 mm 180°/.060 sec
50 mm & 63 mm 180°/.075 sec
3A-6
ENGINEERING DATA: SERIES RL ROTARY ACTUATORS
THEORETICAL TORQUE OUTPUT
INPUT BORE SIZE
PRESSURE 12 mm 16 mm 20 mm 25 mm 32 mm 40mm 50 mm 63 mm
psi bar in-lb Nm in-lb Nm in-lb Nm in-lb Nm in-lb Nm in-lb Nm in-lb Nm in-lb Nm
40 2.7 1.2 .13 2.5 .28 4.9 .55 9.1 1.0 19 2.1 39 4.4 73 8.3 145 16
50 3.4 1.5 .16 3.1 .35 6.1 .69 11 1.3 23 2.6 49 5.5 91 10 181 20
60 4.1 1.8 .20 3.7 .42 7.3 .83 14 1.6 28 3.2 58 6.6 110 12 217 25
70 4.8 2.0 .23 4.4 .49 8.5 .96 16 1.8 33 3.7 68 7.7 128 14 254 29
80 5.5 2.3 .26 5.0 .56 9.7 1.1 18 2.1 37 4.2 78 8.8 146 17 290 33
90 6.2 2.6 .30 5.6 .64 11 1.2 21 2.3 42 4.8 88 9.9 164 19 326 37
100 6.8 2.9 .33 6.2 .71 12 1.4 23 2.6 47 5.3 97 11 183 21 362 41
120 8.2 3.5 .40 7.5 .85 15 1.7 27 3.1 56 6.3 117 13 219 25 435 49
130 8.9 3.8 .43 8.1 .92 16 1.8 30 3.4 61 6.9 127 14 237 27 471 53
140 9.6 4.1 .46 8.7 .99 17 1.9 32 3.6 65 7.4 136 15 256 29 507 57
150 10 4.4 .49 9.4 1.1 18 2.1 34 3.9 70 7.9 146 17 274 31 544 61
3A
ROTARY ACTUATOR WEIGHT TABLE
NOMINAL ROTATION
BORE TYPE OF 45° OR 90° 135° OR 180° 225° OR 270°
SIZE UNIT lb kg lb kg lb kg
PLAIN 0.3 0.13 0.4 0.18 0.4 0.18
12 mm CUSHION 0.4 0.18 0.4 0.18 0.5 0.22
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT 0.4 0.18 0.5 0.22 0.5 0.22
PLAIN 0.4 0.18 0.5 0.22 0.6 0.27
16 mm CUSHION 0.5 0.23 0.6 0.27 0.7 0.32
PLAIN 0.7 0.32 0.8 0.36 0.9 0.41
20 mm CUSHION 0.9 0.41 0.9 0.41 1.0 0.45
PLAIN 1.1 0.50 1.2 0.54 1.4 0.64
25 mm CUSHION 1.4 0.64 1.5 0.68 1.6 0.70
PLAIN 1.7 0.77 2.0 0.91 2.3 1.04
32 mm CUSHION 2.0 0.91 2.3 1.04 2.7 1.22
PLAIN 2.6 1.17 3.3 1.49 4.3 1.95
40 mm CUSHION 3.2 1.45 4.0 1.81 4.9 2.22
PLAIN 5.2 2.36 6.0 2.72 6.9 3.13
50 mm CUSHION 6.0 2.72 6.7 3.04 7.7 3.49
PLAIN 9.2 4.17 10.5 4.76 12.3 5.57
63 mm CUSHION 10.4 4.71 11.8 5.35 13.5 6.12
NOTE: Units with shock pad options are the same approximate weight as plain units. Units
with shock absorber options are the same approximate weight as units with angle adjustment.
3A-7
OPTIONS: SERIES RL ROTARY ACTUATORS
45° ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
AB BOTH DIRECTIONS
G PORT

AC COUNTERCLOCKWISE DIRECTION V MAX
F Y HEX

AW CLOCKWISE DIRECTION
EE
Angle adjustment screws each allow the nominal angle of T

rotation to be reduced by up to 45° from each end of rotation (-AC E SQ
or -AW options). With adjustments at both ends of the unit, a total
reduction of 90° (-AB option) can be achieved. Angle adjustment is THREAD SEAL AND WASHER
available in either or both directions.
3A
NOTE: Angle adjustment options are not available with cushion

or shock absorber options in the same direction.
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT SCREW
BORE SIZE NOMINAL ROTATION E EE F G T V Y

12 mm 45°, 90°, 180°, 270° .964 [24.5] .482 [12.25] .552 [14.0] 10-32 THD [M5 x 0.8] .233 [5.9] .511 [13.0] 4 mm
16 mm 45°, 90°, 180°, 270° 1.082 [27.5] .541 [13.75] .552 [14.0] 10-32 THD [M5 x 0.8] .289 [7.3] .649 [16.5] 4 mm
20 mm 45°, 90°, 180°, 270° 1.260 [32.0] .630 [16.0] .552 [14.0] 10-32 THD [M5 x 0.8] .349 [8.9] .747 [19.0] 6 mm
25 mm 45°, 90°, 180°, 270° 1.516 [38.5] .758 [19.25] .827 [21.0] 1/8 NPT [1/8 BSP] .292 [7.4] .767 [19.5] 6 mm
32 mm 45°, 90°, 180°, 270° 1.732 [44.0] .866 [22.0] .827 [21.0] 1/8 NPT [1/8 BSP] .488 [12.4] .984 [25.0] 8 mm
40 mm 45°, 90°, 180°, 270° 2.086 [53.0] 1.043 [26.5] .984 [25.0] 1/8 NPT [1/8 BSP] .476 [12.1] 1.421 [36.1] 10 mm
50 mm 45°, 90°, 180°, 270° 2.480 [63.0] 1.240 [31.5] 1.024 [26.0] 1/4 NPT [1/4 BSP] .725 [18.4] 1.378 [35.0] 10 mm
63 mm 45°, 90°, 180°, 270° 2.972 [75.5] 1.486 [37.75] 1.024 [26.0] 1/4 NPT [1/4 BSP] .849 [21.6] 1.378 [35.0] 10 mm
SHOCK PADS
SHOCK PAD INSTALLED

BB BOTH DIRECTIONS
SHOCK PAD INSTALLED

BC COUNTERCLOCKWISE DIRECTION
SHOCK PAD INSTALLED

BW CLOCKWISE DIRECTION
Polyurethane shock pads for noise reduction and absorption of
shock at ends of rotation are available on each end of Series RL
Rotary Actuators. Reduction of shock permits higher piston
velocities for shorter cycle times. Noise reduction is beneficial for
the working environment. See pages 3A-14 through 3A-15 for
information on unit stopping capacity.
NOTE: Shock pad options are not available on 12 mm units, or

with shock absorber or cushion options in the same direction.

DB CUSHION BOTH DIRECTIONS
CUSHION COUNTERCLOCKWISE CUSHION CLOCKWISE

DC DIRECTION CUSHION
COUNTERCLOCKWISE
1
F G PORT E/2
DW CUSHION CLOCKWISE DIRECTION

2 4
EE
PHD Cushions allow smooth deceleration at the end of rotation.

T
When a cushion is activated, the remaining volume of air in the
exhaust side of the actuator is expelled through an adjustable needle E SQUARE
valve, controlling the rate of deceleration of the pinion shaft. The 3
effective cushion length is approximately 40° at the end of full

nominal rotation. See pages 3A-14 through 3A-15 for information
3A
on unit stopping capacity.
Cushion performance will not be realized on units of 45° or
less due to 40° of effective cushion length.
NOTE: Cushion options are not available with angle adjustment,

shock absorber, or shock pad options in the same direction.
BORE SIZE NOMINAL ROTATION E EE F G T

12 mm 45°, 90°, 135°,180°, 225°, 270° .964 [24.5] .226 [5.75] .728 [18.5] 10-32 THD [M5 x 0.8] .233 [5.9]
16 mm 45°, 90°, 135°,180°, 225°, 270° 1.082 [27.5] .728 [18.5] .827 [21.0] 10-32 THD [M5 x 0.8] .289 [7.3]
20 mm 45°, 90°, 135°,180°, 225°, 270° 1.260 [32.0] .856 [21.75] .866 [22.0] 10-32 THD [M5 x 0.8] .349 [8.9]
25 mm 45°, 90°, 135°,180°, 225°, 270° 1.516 [38.5] 1.043 [26.5] 1.004 [25.5] 1/8 NPT [1/8 BSP] .292 [7.4]
32 mm 45°, 90°, 135°,180°, 225°, 270° 1.732 [44.0] 1.161 [29.5] 1.063 [27.0] 1/8 NPT [1/8 BSP] .488 [12.4]
40 mm 45°, 90°, 135°,180°, 225°, 270° 2.086 [53.0] 1.457 [37.0] 1.142 [29.0] 1/8 NPT [1/8 BSP] .476 [12.1]
50 mm 45°, 90°, 135°,180°, 225°, 270° 2.480 [63.0] 1.752 [44.5] 1.260 [32.0] 1/4 NPT [1/4 BSP] .725 [18.4]
63 mm 45°, 90°, 135°,180°, 225°, 270° 2.972 [75.5] 1.998 [50.75] 1.260 [32.0] 1/4 NPT [1/4 BSP] .849 [21.6]
MOUNTING HOLES IN
GX POSITIONS 3 & 4 1
5
This option provides mounting holes on the back side

(position 4) and the bottom side (position 3). Standard units are 2 4
supplied with mounting holes on the front side (position 2) and the
bottom side (position 3). The mounting pattern for this option is
identical to the pattern shown in the dimensions on pages
3A-4 and 3A-5.
3

MAGNETS FOR PHD MINIATURE
E HALL EFFECT SWITCHES
This option equips the rotary actuator with magnets on the rack
for use with PHD Series 5360 Miniature Hall Effect Switches. These
switches mount easily to the actuator using the “T” slot in the top of
the body. Not available on 12 mm and 16 mm units.
PART NO. COLOR DESCRIPTION

53603-1-02 Yellow NPN (Sink) 4.5-24 VDC, 2 meter cable
53604-1-02 Red PNP (Source) 4.5-24 VDC, 2 meter cable
53623-1 Yellow NPN (Sink) 4.5-24 VDC, Quick Connect
53624-1 Red PNP (Source) 4.5-24 VDC, Quick Connect

I
3A
MAGNETORESISTIVE SWITCHES
for use with PHD Magnetoresistive Switches. These switches mount
easily to the actuator using the “T” slot in the top of the body.
Minimum sensing rotation of 90° for 12 mm and 16 mm units. .317 [8.0]

53605-1-02 Black NPN 6-24 VDC, 2 m cable
53606-1-02 Orange PNP 6-24 VDC, 2 m cable
53625-1 Black NPN 6-24 VDC, Quick Connect
53626-1 Orange PNP 6-24 VDC, Quick Connect

M REED SWITCHES
for use with PHD Series 5360 Miniature Reed Switches. These
the body. Not available on 12 mm units. Minimum sensing rotation
of 90° for 16 mm units.
PHD Series 5360 Miniature Hall Effect, Reed, and

Magnetoresistive Switches are designed specifically to provide
an input signal to various types of programmable controllers of
logic systems. See Switches and Sensors section for information on
the Series 5360 Miniature Switches.

53602-2-02 White Sink or Source Type 4.5-24 VDC, 2 meter cable
53609-2-02 Green AC Type 110-120 VAC with Current Limit,
2 meter cable
53622-2 White Sink or Source Type VDC, Quick Connect
53629-2 Green AC Type 110-120 VAC, Quick Connect
with Current Limit

SHOCK ABSORBER INSTALLED SHOCK ABSORBER
NB BOTH DIRECTIONS
(CLOCKWISE)
SHOCK ABSORBER INSTALLED

NC COUNTERCLOCKWISE DIRECTION PHD,
Inc.
THREAD SEAL
COVER
WASHER
NW CLOCKWISE DIRECTION CAP
Hydraulic shock absorbers provide optimum control of SHOCK ABSORBER

deceleration and maximum load stopping capacity. The -NB, -NC, (COUNTERCLOCKWISE)
and -NW options equip the rotary actuator with a hydraulic shock SHOCK LOCK NUT
absorber installed in the cap(s). See pages 3A-14 through 3A-15 for
details of stopping capacity with built-in shock absorbers. Shock F
A MAX B ACROSS
absorbers are nominally effective for 45° of rotation each direction.
3A
FLATS
NOTE: The shock absorber also provides the rotation

adjustment. Shock absorber options are not available on 12 mm,
16 mm, or 20 mm units or with angle adjustment, cushion, or shock
pad options in the same direction.
SHOCK ABSORBER READY

GS BOTH DIRECTIONS
SHOCK ABSORBER
MOUNTING HOLE
GT COUNTERCLOCKWISE DIRECTION
(CLOCKWISE)
PH D
, Inc .
GU CLOCKWISE DIRECTION
The -GS, -GT, and -GU options should only be ordered if the SHOCK ABSORBER
READY CAPS
shock absorber(s) is to be supplied separately from the rotary
SHOCK ABSORBER
actuator. These options make provisions for the installation of MOUNTING HOLE
hydraulic shock absorbers but do not include the shock absorber (COUNTERCLOCKWISE)
units. They include the shock sealing kit for each direction ordered.
See pages 3A-14 through 3A-15 for details of stopping capacity with
built-in shock absorbers.
damage the actuator and void the warranty. Only shock absorbers
NOTE: The shock absorber also provides rotation adjustment. specified by PHD should be used in Series RL Rotary Actuators. The
Shock absorbers must be installed in the rotary actuator body prior use of any other shock absorbers will adversely affect actuator
to operating the unit. Operation without shock absorbers can performance and service life.
SHOCK ABSORBER SPECIFICATIONS

PHD SHOCK KINETIC
SHOCK ABSORBER ENERGY A B ACROSS
BORE ABSORBER THREAD STROKE WEIGHT LOAD MAX. FLATS F
SIZE NUMBER TYPE in mm lb kg in-lb Nm in mm in mm in mm
25 mm 60335-04 9/16-18 .19 4.83 .12 .05 2.00 .23 2.35 59.7 .50 12.7 .827 21.0
32 mm 60335-05 3/4-16 .25 6.35 .34 .15 4.00 .45 2.75 69.6 .69 17.5 .827 21.0
40 mm 60335-06 1-12 .29 7.37 .57 .26 10.00 1.13 3.81 96.8 .88 22.2 .984 25.0
50 mm 60335-06 1-12 .29 7.37 .57 .26 16.00 1.81 3.77 95.8 .88 22.2 1.024 26.0
63 mm 60335-07 1-12 .37 9.40 .57 .26 28.00 3.16 3.76 95.4 .88 22.2 1.024 26.0

Q13 DOUBLE SHAFT EXTENSION BORE SIZE P [h8]

.1875
Q
.630
R
SEE FIGURE 1, PAGE 3A-4
12 mm
[6.0] [16.0] [2.0 SQ x 10.0]
This option provides a shaft extension out the front side .2495 .748 203 WOODRUFF
(position 2) and the back side (position 4) of the actuator. This 16 mm
[8.0] [19.0] [3.0 SQ x 14.0]
double shaft extension can be used for mounting tooling, fixturing, .3125 .748 204 WOODRUFF
or for tripping external proximity switches. The one-piece pinion 20 mm
[8.0] [19.0] [3.0 SQ x 14.0]
construction provides the same bearing load capacities for both
.3745 1.004 204 WOODRUFF
front and rear shaft extensions. 25 mm
[10.0] [25.5] [3.0 SQ x 16.0]
.4995 1.260 1/8 SQ x 3/4
32 mm
[14.0] [32.0] [5.0 SQ x 20.0]
BORE SIZE P [h8] Q R
.6245 1.496 3/16 SQ x 1.00
.1875 .630 SEE FIGURE 1, PAGE 3A-4 40 mm
12 mm [16.0] [38.0] [5.0 SQ x 25.0]
[6.0] [16.0] [2.0 SQ x 10.0]
.7495 1.752 3/16 SQ x 1-1/4
.2495 .748 203 WOODRUFF 50 mm
16 mm
3A
[20.0] [44.5] [6.0 SQ x 30.0]

[8.0] [19.0] [3.0 SQ x 14.0]
.9995 2.007 1/4 SQ x 1-3/8
.3125 .748 204 WOODRUFF 63 mm
20 mm [30.0] [51.0] [8.0 x 7.0 x 36.0 RECT]
[8.0] [19.0] [3.0 SQ x 14.0]
.3745 1.004 204 WOODRUFF Numbers in [ ] are for metric units and are in mm.
25 mm
[10.0] [25.5] [3.0 SQ x 16.0]
.4995 1.260 1/8 SQ x 3/4
32 mm
[14.0] [32.0] [5.0 SQ x 20.0]
.6245 1.496 3/16 SQ x 1.00
40 mm
[16.0] [38.0] [5.0 SQ x 25.0]
.7495 1.752 3/16 SQ x 1-1/4
50 mm
[20.0] [44.5] [6.0 SQ x 30.0]
.9995 2.007 1/4 SQ x 1-3/8
63 mm
[30.0] [51.0] [8.0 x 7.0 x 36.0 RECT]
1
U4 PORT POSITION 2 5
U6 PORT POSITION 3 2 4
U8 PORT POSITION 4
Port positions on units with angle adjustment or shock 3

absorber options are provided with a standard port in position 1.
The port position may be rotated by specifying the desired option.

ACCESSORIES: SERIES RL ROTARY ACTUATORS
KEYLESS HUB ADAPTOR KIT
This kit provides an output hub for simple attachment of
tooling or other PHD actuators to the Series RL Rotary Actuators.
The PHD Keyless Hub Adaptor can be precisely adjusted to any
KEYLESS HUB ADAPTOR
angular and axial position on the rotary actuator shaft for maximum
application versatility.
GRIPPER
B
A ACROSS FLATS
(HEX)
3A
D Ø d SHAFT
.050 [1.27 mm] MIN

HUB/MTG COMPONENT L2
NOT INCLUDED
L1
TRANTORQUE PHD MAX. TRANSMISSIBLE INSTALLATION

IMPERIAL PART PART d D D L1 L2 B A TORQUE THRUST WEIGHT TORQUE ON NUT
UNIT NUMBER NUMBER in in TOL. in in in in in-lb lb oz in-lb
RLS112 6202103 60264-01 .188 .625 ± .0015 .750 .375 .125 .500 100 700 .50 125
RLS116 6202105 60264-02 .250 .625 ± .0015 .750 .375 .125 .500 150 790 .50 125
RLS120 6202107 60264-03 .313 .750 ± .0015 .875 .438 .125 .625 200 890 1.0 150
RLS125 6202109 60264-04 .375 .750 ± .0015 .875 .438 .125 .625 250 925 1.0 150
RLS132 6202112 60264-06 .500 .875 ± .0015 1.00 .500 .188 .750 350 980 1.5 175
RLS140 6202120 60264-09 .625 1.50 ± .0015 1.50 .750 .313 1.25 1750 3300 8.0 1200
RLS150 6202160 60264-11 .750 1.50 ± .003 1.50 .750 .313 1.25 2500 4400 8.0 1200
RLS163 6202240 60264-15 1.00 1.75 ± .003 1.875 .875 .438 1.50 3500 6600 11.0 1500
TRANTORQUE PHD MAX. TRANSMISSIBLE INSTALLATION

METRIC PART PART d D D L1 L2 B A TORQUE THRUST WEIGHT TORQUE ON NUT
UNIT NUMBER NUMBER mm mm TOL. mm mm mm mm Nm kN kg Nm
RLS512 6202660 60265-02 6 16.0 ± .0015 19.0 9.5 3 13 16 3.4 0.014 19.1
RLS516 6202680 60265-04 8 19.0 ± .0015 22.0 11.0 3 16 23 4.0 0.028 17.0
RLS520 6202680 60265-04 8 19.0 ± .0015 22.0 11.0 5 16 23 4.0 0.028 17.0
RLS525 6202700 60265-06 10 22.5 ± .0015 25.5 12.5 5 19 30 4.2 0.042 19.8
RLS532 6202740 60265-09 14 25.5 ± .0015 28.5 16.0 5 22 44 4.4 0.560 22.6
RLS540 6202760 60265-11 16 25.5 ± .0015 28.5 16.0 5 22 50 4.5 0.560 22.6
RLS550 6202811 60265-17 20 45.0 ± .003 47.5 21.5 11 38 290 21.0 0.310 170
RLS563 6202835 60265-22 30 51.0 ± .003 57.0 21.5 13 46 580 35.4 0.450 225
NOTE: The torque required to install Trantorque adaptors exceeds the maximum value that can be safely applied to the rack and pinion
assembly of Series RL Rotary Actuators. The tooling or component attached to the Trantorque adaptor must be constrained, to avoid
excessive loading on the pinion gear, while the nut is being tightened to the torque specified above. Failure to follow this procedure will
result in damage to the actuator.

ROTARY ACTUATOR SELECTION: RL ROTARY ACTUATORS
To select the appropriate RL rotary actuator, it is crucial to consider 3) Determine the stopping capacity of the actuator by using the
several factors including bearing capacity, torque requirements and equation given below.
stopping capacity of the actuator. The bearing capacities are listed
on page 3A-6. To determine the required torque to rotate the load in KINETIC ENERGY BASIC EQUATION
a given time, the rotational mass moments of inertia, gravity, time
and acceleration must be taken into account. To stop an actuator, all KE = 1/2 Jm ω2 (Fa)
of the same required information for torque is needed plus kinetic a) Determine the rotational velocity by using equation A.
energy. Follow the steps below to select the appropriate RL actuator.
1) Review pages 3A-6 to make sure RL rotary actuator bearings ROTATIONAL VELOCITY EQUATIONS
can withstand axial and radial bearing loads.
2) Determine the torque requirements of the actuator. EQUATION A

Average Velocity (rad/sec)
a) Determine Mass Moment of Inertia. Uniformly accelerated from rest
Select the illustration from the application types on the
rad .0175 x Degrees of Rotation
following page that most resembles your specific ω= =
sec Time of Rotation in seconds
application. Several separate calculations may be
3A
necessary to fully describe your application. Using the

appropriate application equation, calculate the mass b) Using Jm from step 2a and velocity from step 3a,
moment of inertia for each type of illustration. The total calculate the kinetic energy of the application.
mass moment of inertia will be the sum of the individual
calculations. c) Select an appropriate Fa factor from the table below.
b) Determine the necessary acceleration.
UNIT APPLICATION
2 x (Rotation angle in radians) DESCRIPTION FACTORS (Fa)
Acceleration (α) =
(Time of Rotation in Seconds)2 plain unit 4
with cushion 4
.035 x (Rotation angle in degrees) with shocks 1.35
Acceleration (α) =
(Time of Rotation in Seconds)2
c) Calculate the required torque. d) Use the KE Energy Table below to select appropriate
Select the illustration from the application types on the RL actuator.
following page that most resembles your specific
appropriate application equation, calculate the mass
moment of inertia for each type of illustration. The total
torque will be the sum of the individual calculations.
Note: Torque calculations are theoretical, an appropriate
safety factor should be considered. PHD recommends a
minimum safety factor of 2 to account for friction loss,
airline and valve size, and attached accessories.
KINETIC ENERGY TABLE

KE MAX. KE MAX. WITH KE MAX. WITH KE MAX. WITH
BORE PLAIN UNIT SHOCK PAD CUSHION SHOCK ABSORBER
SIZE in-lb Nm in-lb Nm in-lb Nm in-lb Nm
12 mm .10 .0113 — — .35 .0396 — —
16 mm .15 .0170 .26 .0294 .53 .0599 — —
20 mm .17 .0192 .30 .0390 .60 .0678 — —
25 mm .21 .0237 .37 .0418 .74 .0836 2.00 .2260
32 mm .46 .0520 .81 .0915 1.61 .1819 4.00 .4520
40 mm .96 .1085 1.68 .1898 3.36 .3800 10.00 1.1300
50 mm 1.70 .1921 2.98 .3367 5.95 .6724 16.00 1.8080
63 mm 2.00 .226 3.50 .3955 7.00 .7910 28.00 3.1640
3A-14
ROTARY ACTUATOR SELECTION: SERIES RL
IMPERIAL UNITS:
Jm = Rotational Mass Moment of Inertia (in-lb-sec2) (Dependent on physical size of object and weight)
g = Gravitational Constant = 386.4 in/sec2 Fg = Weight of Load (lb) k = Radius of Gyration (in)
T = Torque required to rotate load (in-lbs) α = Acceleration (rad/sec2) t = time (sec)
SF = Safety Factor
METRIC UNITS:
Jm = Rotational Mass Moment of Inertia (N-m-sec2) (Dependent on physical size of object and weight)
g = Gravitational Constant = 9.81 m/sec2 Fg = Weight of Load (N) k = Radius of Gyration (m)
T = Torque required to rotate load (N-m) α = Acceleration (rad/sec2) t = time (sec)
M = Mass = Fg / g (kg) SF = Safety Factor
BALANCED LOADS
T = Jm x α x SF
Disk Disk Solid Sphere

Mounted on center End mounted on center Mounted on center
3A
L
k
k
k
2
Jm = Fg x k 2 Fg
2
Fg 1
g 2 Jm =
g
x
4
x ( L3 + k )2 Jm =
5
x x k2
g
LOAD ORIENTATION
Rectangular Plate Rod
Mounted on center Mounted on center
k dim is
radius
of rod
Tg = Rotating Vertically b
(with gravity)
a
a
2 2 2 2
T = Rotating Horizontally Jm = Fg x a + b Jm = Fg x a + 3k
(without gravity) g 12 g 12
UNBALANCED LOADS UNBALANCED LOADS

Tg = [(Jm x α) + (Fg x k)] x SF Tg = [(Jm x α) + [(Fg2 - Fg1) x (a + ( b-a ))]] x SF
T = Jm x α x SF 2
T = Jm x α x SF
Point Load Rectangular Plate Rod

Mounted off center k dim is Mounted off center
radius
of rod
c Fg2 Fg2
b
k
Fg Fg1
b Fg1
a
a
Fg 2 2
Fg2 (4b2 + 3k2)
(Fg
2 2 2 2
Jm =
g
x k2 Jm = Fg1 x 4a + c + Fg2 x 4b + c
g 12 g 12
Jm =
g1
x (4a + 3k ) +
12 g)(
x
12
)
3A-15
APPLICATION EXAMPLE: SERIES RL ROTARY ACTUATORS
EXAMPLE A-Disk rotating about centerline of unit. Numbers in [ ] are for metric
units and are in mm.
1) Determine load information:

k
IMPERIAL METRIC 1.00
ROTATION ANGLE / TIME 180°/.10 sec 180°/.10 sec [25.4]
LOAD Aluminum Disk Aluminum Disk k
WEIGHT .236 lb 1.05 N

MASS .107 Kg 1.75
PRESSURE 87 psi 6 bar [44.45]
SAFETY FACTOR 2 2
2) Determine torque requirement for the application: b) Using Jm from step 2a and velocity from step 3a, determine
KE of the system from the basic KE equation:
a) Calculate Rotational Mass Moment of Inertia (Jm) using
equations given on page 3A-15. IMPERIAL METRIC
KE = 1/2 x Jm x ω 2 x Fa KE = 1/2 x Jm x ω 2 x Fa
3A
IMPERIAL METRIC KE = .5 x .000234 x 31.52 x 4 KE = .5 x 2.64 x 10-5 x 31.52 x 4

KE = .464 in-lbs KE = .052 N-m
Fg k2 Fg k2
Jm = x Jm = x
g 2 g 2
IF SHOCKS ARE USED:
2 IMPERIAL METRIC
Jm = .236 lb x (.875 in) Jm =
1.05 N
x
(.0222m) 2
KE = 1/2 x Jm x ω2 x Fa KE = 1/2 x Jm x ω2 x Fa
386.4 2 9.81 2
KE = .5 x .000234 x 31.52 x 1.35 KE = .5 x 2.64 x 10-5 x 31.52 x 1.35
Jm = .000234 in-lb-sec2 Jm = 2.64 x 10-5 N-m-sec2 KE = .157 in-lbs KE = .018 N-m
When the recommended shocks are used, three times the KE can
b) Determine required acceleration of the load: be handled, or conversely, a smaller unit can be used.
c) Use the KE Energy table on page 3A-14 to select the

α = .035 x rotational angle (deg)2 appropriate RL actuator. The following units satisfy the
[rotational time (sec)]
requirements. 32 mm plain, 32 mm with shock pad,
α = .035 x 180° = 630 rad/sec2 or 25 mm with cushions.
(.1 sec)2
c) Calculate required torque:
IMPERIAL METRIC
T = Jm x α x SF T = Jm x α x 2
T = .000234 x 630 x 2 = .29 in-lbs T = 2.64 x 10-5 x 630 x 2 = .03 N-m
Review torque chart on page 3A-7 for 87 psi [6 bar] to select

minimum actuator based on torque.
3) Determine the stopping capacity of the actuator for the

application:
a) Determine the average rotational velocity using Equation A

on page 3A-14.
rotation angle (deg)
ω = rad/sec = .0175 x
rotational time (sec)
ω = .0175 x 180° = 31.5 rad/sec
.1 sec
3A-16
APPLICATION EXAMPLE: SERIES RL ROTARY ACTUATORS
EXAMPLE B-Combination of rectangular plate mounted on Numbers in [ ] are for metric
center and a point load mounted off center. units and are in mm.
6" [152.4] (a)

2"
[50.8]
IMPERIAL METRIC (b)
ROTATION ANGLE / TIME 180°/.5 sec 180°/.5 sec 1lb
2"
RECTANGULAR PLATE Steel Plate Steel Plate [50.8]
[4.45 N]
WEIGHT 1.698 lb 7.55 N (k)
MASS .77 Kg
POINT LOAD 1 lb 4.45 N
(2" off center) (50.8 mm off center)
PRESSURE 87 psi 6 bar
SAFETY FACTOR 2 2
2) Determine torque requirement for the application: RECTANGULAR PLATE

IMPERIAL METRIC
a) Calculate Rotational Mass Moment of Inertia (Jm) using T = Jm x α x SF T = Jm x α x SF
3A
equations given on page 3A-15.
T = .0146 x 25.2 x 2 = .74 in-lbs T = .00166 x 25.2 x 2 = .084 N-m
POINT LOAD
Total T = 4.5 + .74 = 5.24 in-lbs Total T = .51 + .084 = .594 N-m
IMPERIAL METRIC
Fg Fg
Jm = x k2 Jm = g x k2 Review torque chart on page 3A-7 for 87 psi [6 bar] to select
g
Jm = 1 lb 4.45 N
x (2 in)2 Jm = x (.0508 m)2 3) Determine the stopping capacity of the actuator for the
386.4 9.81 application:
Jm = .0104 in-lb-sec2 Jm = .00117 N-m-sec2
on page 3A-14.
RECTANGULAR PLATE
ω = .0175 x rotation angle (deg) ω = .0175 x 180° = 6.3 rad/sec
IMPERIAL METRIC rotational time (sec) .5 sec
Fg a2+b2 Fg a2+b2
Jm = Jm = g x 12
g x 12 b) Using Jm from step 2a and velocity from step 3a, determine
2 2
Jm = 7.55 x (.1524) +(.0508)
2 2
Jm = 1.698 x 6 +2
386.4 12 9.81 12 IMPERIAL METRIC
2 2 KE = 1/2 x Jm x ω 2 x Fa KE = 1/2 x Jm x ω 2 x Fa
Jm = .0146 in-lb-sec Jm = .00165 N-m-sec
KE = .5 x .025 x 6.32 x 4 KE = .5 x .00282 x 6.32 x 4
KE = 1.98 in-lbs KE = .224 N-m
Total Jm Total Jm
= .0146+.0104=.025 in-lb-sec2 = .00165+.00117=.00282N-m-sec2
IF SHOCKS ARE USED:
IMPERIAL METRIC
b) Determine required acceleration of the load:
α = .035 x rotational angle (deg) KE = .5 x .025 x 6.32 x 1.35 KE = .5 x .00282 x 6.32 x 1.35
[time (sec)]2 KE = .66 in-lbs KE = .076 N-m
α = .035 x 180° = 25.2 rad/sec2
(.5 sec)2 When the recommended shocks are used, three times the KE can
be handled, or conversely, a smaller rotary unit can be used.
c) Use the KE Energy table on page 3A-14 to select the
POINT LOAD
appropriate RL actuator. The following units satisfy the
IMPERIAL METRIC
requirements: 63 mm plain, 50 mm with shock pads, and
T = [(Jm x α)+(Fg x k)] x 2 T = [(Jm x α)+(Fg x k)] x SF 40 mm with cushions.
T = [(.0140 x 25.2) + (1 x 2)] x 2 T = [(.00117 x 25.2) + (4.45 x .0508)] x 2
T = 4.5 in-lbs T = .51 N-m
3A-17
ROTARY ACTUATORS INDEX:
Ordering Data
Page 3B-2
SERIES RA
Benefits
Page 3B-3
Dimensions
Pages 3B-4 and 3B-5
High Load and Stopping Capacity, Zero Backlash
Engineering Data
Pages 3B-6 and 3B-7
Options
Pages 3B-8 to 3B-11
Rotary Actuator
3B
Selection
Pages 3B-12 to 3B-13
Application Example
Page 3B-14 to 3B-15
3B-1
INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION CAT-03 www.phdinc.com/ra
3B
3B-2
SWITCH READY
E - Hall Effect magnets for Series 5360 Switch
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/ra
I - Magnetoresistive magnets for Series 5360 Switch
M - Reed magnets for Series 5360 Switch
TO ORDER SPECIFY: BORE SIZE Switches must be ordered separately. See page 3B-9.
Product, Series, Type, Design No., Bore Size, 20 mm (.78") OUTPUT TYPES
Angle of Rotation, and Options. 25 mm (1.0") PORT CONTROL Q10 - Output hub
32 mm (1.25") PB - Both directions Q19 - Output hub with hollow pinion shaft
PRODUCT TYPE 40 mm (1.5") PC - Counterclockwise (Available on 32 mm–50 mm units only)
R - Rotary Actuator S - 150 psi [10 bar] Air Max. 50 mm (2.0") PW - Clockwise Q22 - Splined output shaft only
R A S 1 20 x 180 – PB – NB – E – Q10
CAT-03
SERIES DESIGN NO. ANGLE OF ROTATION CUSHION CONTROL
A - Standard Duty 1 - Imperial 45°, 90°, 135°, 180°, 225°, 270° DB - Cushion both directions
5 - Metric DC - Cushion counterclockwise
DW - Cushion clockwise
SHOCK ABSORBER
NB - Shock installed both directions
NC - Shock installed counterclockwise
SHOCK ABSORBER CHART NW - Shock installed clockwise
BORE PHD SHOCK Options may affect unit length. GS - Shock ready both directions
See unit dimension and options
SIZE ABSORBER NO. ! pages for adders. GT - Shock ready counterclockwise
20 mm 56722-01 GU - Shock ready clockwise
25 mm 56722-02 Shock absorbers must be ordered
ORDERING DATA: SERIES RA ROTARY ACTUATORS
32 mm 56722-03 separately for -GS, -GT, and -GU options.

40 mm 56722-04 225° and 270° units are standard
50 mm 56722-05 shock ready.
SOLUTIONS FOR
BENEFITS: SERIES RA ROTARY ACTUATORS
BENEFITS
■ Series RA Rotary Actuators are available in five sizes and six
standard rotations with torques ranging to 150 in-lb at 100 psi
[17 Nm at 7 bar] to cover a wide range of applications.
■ All units have zero backlash at ends of rotation for precise

rotary positioning.
■ The high strength steel alloy rack and one-piece pinion shaft
are designed and tested to operate for a minimum of 10 million
maintenance-free cycles.
■ Free floating pistons with pressure and wear compensating

seals provide long life and low friction with a 5 psi [0.3 bar]
breakaway pressure.
3B
■ Oversize sealed ball bearings and large pinion shafts
ensure shaft stability under heavy loading and high load
stopping ability.
■ Built-in standard angle adjustments, of +10°, -45° on each

nominal angle rotation, make it easy to adjust to specific
rotation requirements. This provides a total range of actuator SPECIFICATIONS 20 mm-50 mm
rotations from 0° to 280°. (+5° -22-1/2° from each end) PISTON SEALS One Block Vee per Piston
PISTONS Free Floating, Acetal Material
■ Mounting patterns on three surfaces provide flexibility in PINION SHAFTS One Piece Alloy Steel
design and unit mounting.
RACKS Alloy Steel
END CAPS Clear Anodized Aluminum
■ Units with rotations of 180° or less have all control
adjustments and ports on top of the actuator saving space and BODY Hardcoated Aluminum
easing accessibility. BEARINGS Two Steel Ball Bearings
PORTS NPT [BSP]
■ Optional built-in hydraulic shock absorbers provide smooth LUBRICATION Permanent for Non-Lube Air
deceleration of external loads and allow for greater load WORKING PRESSURE 150 psi [10 bar] Air Max.
stopping capacity. STANDARD ROTATIONS 45°, 90°, 135°, 180°, 225°, 270°
OPTIONS Port Controls®, Cushions,
■ Optional built-in flow controls save space and provide constant
Output Hub, Shock Absorber,
and accurate control of the rotation speed.
Magnets for Proximity Switches
■ Optional built-in adjustable cushions reduce end-of-rotation
shock and increase the unit's stopping capacity.
■ Optional hubbed pinion shaft provides a flat mounting surface

with a four bolt pattern for easy mounting of tooling and
accessories to the actuator's shaft.
■ Miniature PHD Proximity Switches mount easily into slots in

the actuator's body for interfacing with an electrical controller.
Units can be specified for use with PHD’s Miniature Reed or
Hall Effect Switches.
■ Series RA Rotary Actuators are available in both metric

and imperial versions allowing flexibility in design for a
world market.
3B-3
DIMENSIONS: SERIES RA ROTARY ACTUATORS
45°, 90°, 135°, or 180° ROTATION UNITS
G* A
Y 4X THRU AND C'BORE
F Y/2 FOR L SHCS
2X X NPT [BSP] PORT
.437
[11.10]
T
J
S SEAT FOR #204
WOODRUFF KEY
FOR RAS120 ONLY

R/2
R
PA O
2X ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
K
D MAX Z
3B
Ø NB ± .0005 x NC DP U
[Ø NB ± 0.013] 1X FRONT & BACK
KEYWAY FOR
Q/2 W KEY
Q ØV H C
B
E/2 MA – 4X FRONT SLOT FOR OPTIONAL

E MB – 4X BACK HALL/REED SWITCH
NOTES:
1) *G DIMENSION INCREASES WITH CUSHION OPTION. SEE PAGE 3B-8.
2) KEYWAY SHOWN AT MID-ROTATION
3) NUMBERS IN [ ] ARE FOR METRIC UNITS AND ARE IN mm.
BORE SIZE NOMINAL ROTATION A B C D E F G H J K

45° OR 90° 3.524 [89.5] .807 1.831 .604 1.574 .394 .768 1.712 .91 1.732
20 mm
135° OR 180° 3.760 [95.0] [20.5] [46.5] [15.34] [40.0] [10.0] [19.5] [43.5] [23.0] [44.0]
45° OR 90° 3.819 [97.0] .983 2.224 .724 1.772 .394 .768 2.087 1.01 1.929
25 mm
135° OR 180° 4.508 [114.5] [25.0] [56.5] [18.39] [45.0] [10.0] [19.5] [53.0] [25.5] [49.0]
45° OR 90° 4.606 [117.0] 1.161 2.697 .920 2.166 .394 .768 2.559 1.18 2.264
32 mm
135° OR 180° 5.650 [143.5] [29.5] [68.5] [23.37] [55.0] [10.0] [19.5] [65.0] [30.0] [57.5]
45° OR 90° 5.256 [133.5] 1.516 3.366 .977 2.558 .472 .945 3.228 1.57 3.071
40 mm
135° OR 180° 6.476 [164.5] [38.5] [85.5] [24.82] [65.0] [12.0] [24.0] [82.0] [39.75] [78.0]
45° OR 90° 6.300 [160.0] 1.674 3.918 1.191 2.952 .472 .945 3.720 1.74 3.346
50 mm
135° OR 180° 7.343 [186.5] [42.5] [99.5] [30.25] [75.0] [12.0] [24.0] [94.5] [44.25] [85.0]
BORE SIZE L MA MB NB NC O PA Q R S
#10 10-24 x .281 10-24 x .375 1.3785 .085 2.047 1.000 1.180 2.166 .276
20 mm
[M5] [M5 x 0.8 x 7] [M5 x 0.8 x 12.5] [35.014] [2.16] [52.0] [25.0] [30.0] [55.0] [7.0]
#10 10-24 x .285 10-24 x .500 1.4572 .080 2.362 1.250 1.378 2.362 .295
25 mm
[M5] [M5 x 0.8 x 7] [M5 x 0.8 x 12.5] [37.013] [2.03] [60.0] [30.0] [35.0] [60.0] [7.5]
1/4 1/4-20 x .250 1/4-20 x .500 1.8509 .100 2.835 1.500 1.772 2.952 .335
32 mm
[M6] [M6 x 1.0 x 7.5] [M6 x 1.0 x 15] [47.013] [2.54] [72.0] [40.0] [45.0] [75.0] [8.5]
5/16 5/16-18 x .437 5/16-18 x .750 2.0477 .115 3.544 1.750 2.164 3.346 .394
40 mm
[M8] [M8 x 1.25 x 12] [M8 x 1.25 x 20] [52.012] [2.92] [90.0] [42.5] [55.0] [85.0] [10.0]
3/8 3/8-16 x .375 3/8-16 x .750 2.4414 .125 3.976 2.000 2.362 3.936 .452
50 mm
[M10] [M10 x 1.5 x 10] [M10 x 1.5 x 20] [62.012] [3.17] [101.0] [55.0] [60.0] [100.0] [11.5]
BORE SIZE T U V W KEY X NPT [BSP] Y Z

1.496 .04 .375/.374 SEE ABOVE 1/8 1.004 .06
20 mm
[38.0] [1.0] [10 (h8)] [3 mm SQ. x 20 mm] [1/8] [25.5] [1.5]
1.772 .04 .4727/.4714 1/8 SQ. x 1.125 1/8 1.124 .08
25 mm
[45.0] [1.0] [12 (h8)] [4 mm SQ. x 25 mm] [1/8] [28.5] [2.0]
2.165 .05 .625/.624 3/16 SQ. x 1.250 1/8 1.458 .08
32 mm
[55.0] [1.2] [16 (h8)] [5 mm SQ. x 32 mm] [1/8] [37.0] [2.0]
2.756 .03 .750/.749 3/16 SQ. x 1.500 1/8 1.598 .08
40 mm
[70.0] [0.8] [17 (h8)] [5 mm SQ. x 35 mm] [1/8] [40.6] [2.0]
3.071 .07 .875/.874 3/16 SQ. x 1.750 1/4 1.984 .10
50 mm
[78.0] [1.8] [22 (h8)] [6 mm SQ. x 45 mm] [1/4] [50.4] [2.5]
3B-4 All dimensions are reference only unless specifically toleranced.

www.phdinc.com/ra CAT-03 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
DIMENSIONS: SERIES RA ROTARY ACTUATORS
225° or 270° ROTATION UNITS
G* A
4X THRU AND
F C'BORE FOR L SHCS
FF
ACROSS FLATS 2X X NPT [BSP] PORT
.437
[11.10]
T
J SEAT FOR #204

S WOODRUFF KEY
FOR RAS120 ONLY

R/2
R
PA O
Ø NB ± .0005 x NC DP
3B
K Z
D MAX [Ø NB ± 0.013] 1X FRONT & BACK U
KEYWAY FOR
W KEY
Q/2
H C
Q ØV
B
2X ANGLE E/2 SLOT FOR OPTIONAL

ADJUSTMENT E MA – 4X FRONT HALL/REED SWITCH
MB – 4X BACK
NOTES:
1) *G DIMENSION INCREASES WITH CUSHION OPTION. SEE PAGE 3B-8.
2) KEYWAY SHOWN AT MID-ROTATION
BORE SIZE NOMINAL ROTATION A B C D E F G H J K

4.390 .807 1.831 4.39 1.574 .394 .768 1.712 .91 1.732
20 mm 225° OR 270°
[111.5] [20.5] [46.5] [111.5] [40.0] [10.0] [19.5] [43.5] [23.0] [44.0]
5.295 .983 2.224 5.06 1.772 .394 .768 2.087 1.01 1.929
25 mm 225° OR 270°
[134.5] [25.0] [56.5] [128.5] [45.0] [10.0] [19.5] [53.0] [25.5] [49.0]
6.693 1.161 2.697 5.87 2.166 .394 .768 2.559 1.18 2.264
32 mm 225° OR 270°
[170.0] [29.5] [68.5] [149.1] [55.0] [10.0] [19.5] [65.0] [30.0] [57.5]
7.736 1.516 3.366 6.66 2.558 .472 .945 3.228 1.57 3.071
40 mm 225° OR 270°
[196.5] [38.5] [85.5] [169.1] [65.0] [12.0] [24.0] [82.0] [39.75] [78.0]
8.917 1.674 3.918 7.32 2.952 .472 .945 3.720 1.74 3.346
50 mm 225° OR 270°
[226.5] [42.5] [99.5] [186.0] [75.0] [12.0] [24.0] [94.5] [44.25] [85.0]
BORE SIZE L MA MB NB NC O PA Q R S
#10 10-24 x .281 10-24 x .375 1.3785 .085 2.047 1.000 1.181 2.166 .276
20 mm
[M5] [M5 x 0.8 x 7] [M5 x 0.8 x 12.5] [35.014] [2.16] [52.0] [25.0] [30.0] [55.0] [7.0]
#10 10-24 x .285 10-24 x .500 1.4572 .080 2.362 1.250 1.378 2.362 .295
25 mm
[M5] [M5 x 0.8 x 7] [M5 x 0.8 x 12.5] [37.013] [2.03] [60.0] [30.0] [35.0] [60.0] [7.5]
1/4 1/4-20 x .250 1/4-20 x .500 1.8509 .100 2.835 1.500 1.772 2.952 .335
32 mm
[M6] [M6 x 1.0 x 7.5] [M6 x 1.0 x 15] [47.013] [2.54] [72.0] [40.0] [45.0] [75.0] [8.5]
5/16 5/16-18 x .437 5/16-18 x .750 2.0477 .115 3.544 1.750 2.164 3.346 .394
40 mm
[M8] [M8 x 1.25 x 12] [M8 x 1.25 x 20] [52.012] [2.92] [90.0] [42.5] [55.0] [85.0] [10.0]
3/8 3/8-16 x .375 3/8-16 x .750 2.4414 .125 3.976 2.000 2.362 3.936 .452
50 mm
[M10] [M10 x 1.5 x 10] [M10 x 1.5 x 20] [62.012] [3.17] [101.0] [55.0] [60.0] [100.0] [11.5]
BORE SIZE T U V W KEY X NPT [BSP] Z FF

1.496 .04 .375/.374 SEE ABOVE 1/8 .06 .39
20 mm
[38.0] [1.0] [10 (h8)] [3 mm SQ. x 20 mm] [1/8] [1.5] [10.0]
1.772 .04 .4727/.4714 1/8 SQ. x 1.125 1/8 .08 .47
25 mm
[45.0] [1.0] [12 (h8)] [4 mm SQ. x 25 mm] [1/8] [2.0] [12.0]
2.165 .05 .625/.624 3/16 SQ. x 1.250 1/8 .08 .71
32 mm
[55.0] [1.2] [16 (h8)] [5 mm SQ. x 32 mm] [1/8] [2.0] [18.0]
2.756 .03 .750/.749 3/16 SQ. x 1.500 1/8 .08 .91
40 mm
[70.0] [0.8] [17 (h8)] [5 mm SQ. x 35 mm] [1/8] [2.0] [23.0]
3.071 .07 .875/.874 3/16 SQ. x 1.750 1/4 .10 .91
50 mm
[78.0] [1.8] [22 (h8)] [6 mm SQ. x 45 mm] [1/4] [2.5] [23.0]
All dimensions are reference only unless specifically toleranced. 3B-5

ENGINEERING DATA: SERIES RA ROTARY ACTUATORS
RA SPECIFICATIONS
BORE GEAR RACKS PISTON DIAMETER PISTON AREA DISPLACEMENT
SIZE 45°-180° 225°-270° in mm in2 mm2 in3/DEG. ROT. mm3/DEG. ROT.
20 mm 1 2 .79 20 .49 314.19 .002 32.77
25 mm 1 2 .98 25 .76 490.32 .004 65.55
32 mm 1 2 1.26 32 1.25 804.19 .007 114.71
40 mm 1 2 1.57 40 1.95 1256.64 .014 229.42
50 mm 1 2 1.97 50 3.04 1963.48 .027 442.45
PRESSURE AND BREAKAWAY RATINGS ROTATIONAL RATES

All Series RA Rotary Actuators have a maximum pressure The average speed of rotation for units with no load is 180°
rating of 150 psi [10 bar] with a 5 psi [0.3 bar] breakaway pressure. in .05 second for 20 mm, 25 mm, and 32 mm bore units, 180° in
They are for pneumatic application only. .06 second for 40 mm bore units, and 180° in .075 second for
50 mm bore units.
OPERATING TEMPERATURES
Standard Series RA Rotary Actuators are recommended for use CONTROLS
3B
in temperatures from -20° to +180°F [-28° to +82°C]. Consult PHD Control of pinion shaft speed is extremely important as inertia
for temperatures beyond this range. force is a function of rotational speed and distance from load to
output shaft center. PHD's built-in flow controls, cushions, and
LUBRICATION shock absorbers should be considered when inertial loads are
applied. See pages 3B-8 through 3B-10 for information on Series
All units are permanently lubricated at assembly for service
RA Rotary Actuator controls. See pages 3B-12 through 3B-13 for
using non-lubricated air. Life can be extended by periodic lubrication
information on load stopping capacity.
of the rack and pinion using high grade bearing grease and by using
lubricated air.
BEARING LOADS TABLE
BACKLASH
AXIAL RADIAL DISTANCE
All units have 0 degrees of backlash at ends of rotation.
BEARING LOAD BEARING LOAD BETWEEN
BORE CAPACITY CAPACITY BEARINGS
ANGLE OF ROTATION SIZE lb N lb N in mm
Standard angles of rotation are 45°, 90°, 135°, 180°, 225°, and 20 mm 97 431 1.34 34.0
376 1672
270°. Consult PHD for other rotation requirements. All units have
25 mm 118 524 453 2015 1.61 40.9
built-in angle adjustments providing +10°, -45°.
32 mm 182 809 640 2846 1.94 49.3
40 mm 237 1054 746 3318 2.56 65.0
ROTATIONAL TOLERANCE 50 mm 325 1445 966 4296 2.90 73.6
The total rotational tolerance of the Series RA Rotary Actuator
is +10°, -0° on the nominal specified rotation.

INPUT BORE SIZE
PRESSURE 20 mm 25 mm 32 mm 40 mm 50 mm
psi bar in-lb Nm in-lb Nm in-lb Nm in-lb Nm in-lb Nm
40 2.7 3.9 .44 7.6 .85 16 1.8 31 3.5 60 6.8
50 3.4 4.9 .55 9.5 1.0 20 2.3 38 4.4 76 8.6
60 4.1 5.8 .65 11 1.2 24 2.8 46 5.2 91 10
70 4.8 6.8 .77 13 1.5 29 3.2 54 6.1 106 12
80 5.5 7.8 .88 15 1.7 33 3.7 62 7.0 121 13
90 6.2 8.8 .99 17 1.9 37 4.2 70 7.9 136 15
100 6.8 9.7 1.1 19 2.1 41 4.6 77 8.8 152 17
120 8.2 11 1.3 22 2.5 49 5.6 93 10 182 20
130 8.9 12 1.4 24 2.7 54 6.1 101 11 197 22
140 9.6 13 1.5 26 3.0 58 6.5 109 12 213 24
150 10 14 1.6 28 3.2 62 7.0 116 13 228 25
3B-6
ENGINEERING DATA: SERIES RA ROTARY ACTUATORS
ROTARY ACTUATOR WEIGHT TABLE
NOMINAL ROTATION
BORE TYPE OF 45° OR 90° 135° OR 180° 225° OR 270°
SIZE UNIT lb kg lb kg lb kg
STANDARD 1.8 .77 1.8 .77 2.3 1.02
20 mm
WITH SHOCK OPTION -NB 2.0 .88 2.1 .89 2.4 1.09
STANDARD 2.4 1.08 2.8 1.24 3.6 1.60
25 mm
WITH SHOCK OPTION -NB 2.9 1.29 3.3 1.46 3.9 1.75
STANDARD 4.3 1.92 4.9 2.19 6.5 2.94
32 mm
STANDARD 7.7 3.47 8.8 3.96 11.8 5.31
40 mm
STANDARD 11.6 5.22 12.8 5.78 17.7 8.01
50 mm
CUSHION AND OUTPUT HUB WEIGHTS
3B
ADDER WITH ADDER WITH
BORE CUSHION OPTION -DB HUB OPTION -Q10 OR -Q19
SIZE lb kg lb kg
20 mm .3 .13 .03 .01
25 mm .4 .16 .03 .01
32 mm .6 .24 .04 .02
40 mm .8 .34 .12 .05
50 mm 1.1 .47 .23 .11
STANDARD ANGLE ADJUSTMENT

All PHD Series RA Rotary Actuators are supplied as standard with NOTE: Cushions are effective for approximately the last 40°
built-in adjustable angle stops. Together these mechanical positive of rotation each direction. The cushion angle will decrease by the
stops provide an adjustment range of +10°, -45° on each nominal angle same amount that the nominal rotation is reduced by the angle
of rotation (see Table 1). (+5°, -22-1/2° from each end.) adjustment. Consult PHD for non-standard angles of rotation if
Units with rotations of 180° or less utilize adjusting screws in the cushions are required.
top of the actuator which stop against a stop cam attached to the pinion
shaft (see Illustration A). Units with rotations of 225° and 270° use
angle adjustment screws located in the end caps which stop against the
TABLE 1
auxiliary lower rack (see Illustration B). When 225° or 270° units are ROTATION ORDERED STANDARD ADJUSTMENT RANGE
ordered with optional shock absorbers, the shock absorbers double as 45° 0° through 55°
the angle adjustment screws. 90° 45° through 100°
The ability to adjust over such a wide range eliminates
135° 90° through 145°
the need to order special units for specific angles of rotation. The range
of nominal rotations and the +10°, -45° adjustments provide a total 180° 135° through 190°
rotation range of 0° to 280° across the Series RA Rotary Actuator line. 225° or 270° 180° through 280°
ILLUSTRATION A ILLUSTRATION B
0°-180° ROTATIONS 181°-270° ROTATIONS
STOP CAM UPPER RACK OMITTED FOR CLARITY
3B-7
OPTIONS: SERIES RA ROTARY ACTUATORS
G
PORT CONTROL®
PB BOTH DIRECTIONS
F PORT CONTROL
COUNTERCLOCKWISE
PORT CONTROL®
PC COUNTERCLOCKWISE DIRECTION AA
PORT CONTROL
PORT CONTROL® CLOCKWISE
PW CLOCKWISE DIRECTION RASx20, RASx25, RASx32
PHD Port Control® is a built-in flow control valve for controlling G
the speed through complete shaft rotation. The Port Control® is F PORT CONTROL
based on the “meter-out” principle and features an adjustable needle COUNTERCLOCKWISE
in a cartridge with an external check seal. The self-locking needle PORT CONTROL
has micrometer threads and is adjustable under pressure. It CLOCKWISE
determines the orifice size which controls the exhaust flow rate of AA
3B
the actuator. The check seal expands while air is exhausting from
the actuator, forcing the air to exhaust past the adjustable needle.
The check seal collapses to allow a free flow of incoming air. The
PHD Port Control® saves space and eliminates the cost of fittings
and installation for external flow control valves.
NOTE: Port Control may not be effective below operating RASx40 & RASx50
pressures of 10 psi [.7 bar].
BORE SIZE F G AA
20 mm .394 [10.0] .768 [19.5] .374 [9.5]
25 mm .394 [10.0] .768 [19.5] .374 [9.5]
32 mm .394 [10.0] .768 [19.5] .374 [9.5]
40 mm .472 [12.0] .945 [24.0] .965 [24.5]
50 mm .472 [12.0] .945 [24.0] 1.083 [27.5]
G CUSHION
F CLOCKWISE
DB CUSHION BOTH DIRECTIONS AA
CUSHION
DC COUNTERCLOCKWISE DIRECTION
CUSHION
COUNTERCLOCKWISE
CUSHION
DW CLOCKWISE DIRECTION BORE SIZE F G AA
20 mm .315 [8.0] 1.280 [32.5] .118 [3.0]
PHD Cushions allow for smooth deceleration at the end of
25 mm .315 [8.0] 1.280 [32.5] .118 [3.0]
rotation. When the cushion operates, the remaining volume of air in
the actuator must exhaust past an adjustable needle, which controls 32 mm .315 [8.0] 1.280 [32.5] .118 [3.0]
the deceleration of the pinion shaft. The effective length of the 40 mm .394 [10.0] 1.378 [35.0] —
cushion is approximately 40° of rotation at the end of full nominal 50 mm .394 [10.0] 1.378 [35.0] —
rotation. The use of angle adjustment screws to reduce the angle of Numbers in [ ] are for metric units and are in mm.
rotation has a direct effect on the length of cushion engagement.
Example: 5° of angle reduction on one end will reduce cushion
engagement by 5° on that end of rotation. See pages 3B-12 through
3B-13 for information on unit stopping capacity with adjustable
cushions.

PORT CONTROL® AND CUSHION LOCATIONS
PORT CONTROL CUSHION G
COUNTERCLOCKWISE CLOCKWISE CUSHION
G F
CLOCKWISE
PORT
CONTROL
AA CLOCKWISE
AA
PORT CONTROL
F COUNTERCLOCKWISE
CUSHION PORT CONTROL CUSHION
COUNTERCLOCKWISE CLOCKWISE COUNTERCLOCKWISE
RASx20, RASx25, RASx32, RASx40 RASx50
BORE SIZE F G AA
20 mm .335 [8.5] 1.280 [32.5] .374 [9.5]
25 mm .335 [8.5] 1.280 [32.5] .374 [9.5]
32 mm
40 mm
.335 [8.5]
.394 [10.0]
1.280 [32.5] .374 [9.5]
1.378 [35.0] .453 [11.5]
I MAGNETORESISTIVE SWITCHES
50 mm .453 [11.5] 1.378 [35.0] 1.083 [27.5]
3B
Numbers in [ ] are for metric units and are in mm. This option equips the rotary actuator with magnets on the rack
for use with PHD Magnetoresistive Switches. These switches mount
easily to the actuator using the “T” slot in the top of the body.
MAGNETS FOR PHD MINIATURE PART NO. COLOR DESCRIPTION

E HALL EFFECT SWITCHES 53605-1-02 Black NPN 6-24 VDC, 2 m cable
53606-1-02 Orange PNP 6-24 VDC, 2 m cable
This option equips the rotary actuator with magnets on the rack 53625-1 Black NPN 6-24 VDC, Quick Connect
for use with PHD Series 5360 Miniature Hall Effect Switches. These 53626-1 Orange PNP 6-24 VDC, Quick Connect
the body.
53603-1-02 Yellow NPN (Sink) 4.5-24 VDC, 2 meter cable
53604-1-02 Red PNP (Source) 4.5-24 VDC, 2 meter cable
53623-1 Yellow NPN (Sink) 4.5-24 VDC, Quick Connect
53624-1 Red PNP (Source) 4.5-24 VDC, Quick Connect FLATS OF STROKE
ADJUSTMENT NUTS MUST
BE ORIENTED AS SHOWN

M REED SWITCHES
This option equips the rotary actuator with magnets on the rack SWITCHES MUST BE
ORIENTED AS SHOWN
for use with PHD Series 5360 Miniature Reed Switches. These FOR PROPER SENSING
the body. .317 [8.0]

53602-2-02 White Sink or Source Type 4.5-24 VDC, 2 meter cable
53609-2-02 Green AC Type 110-120 VAC with Current Limit,
2 meter cable PHD Series 5360 Miniature Hall Effect and Reed Switches
53622-2 White Sink or Source Type VDC, Quick Connect are designed specifically to provide an input signal to various types
53629-2 Green AC Type 110-120 VAC, Quick Connect of programmable controllers or logic systems. See Switches and
with Current Limit Sensors section for information on the Series 5360 Miniature
Switches.
NOTE: When mounting miniature switches on the 20 mm and 25

mm bore units with rotations up to 180°, see the drawing above.
Minimum rotation on a 20 mm bore unit with two switches is 45°.

SHOCK ABSORBER INSTALLED SHOCK ABSORBER
NB BOTH DIRECTIONS
(COUNTERCLOCKWISE)

NC COUNTERCLOCKWISE DIRECTION PHD,
Inc.
NW CLOCKWISE DIRECTION
CAP
The hydraulic shock absorber options are designed for the SHOCK ABSORBER
maximum in deceleration control and rotational stopping ability. The (CLOCKWISE)
-NB, -NC, and -NW options provide the rotary actuator with the SHOCK LOCK NUT
hydraulic shock absorber installed in the appropriate location(s).
See pages 3B-12 through 3B-13 for details on unit stopping capacity A MAX
with built-in shock absorbers. Shock absorbers are nominally
3B
B ACROSS
effective for 45° of rotation each direction. FLATS
NOTE: The shock absorber doubles as the rotation adjustment

on units with rotations greater than 180°.

GS BOTH DIRECTIONS

GT COUNTERCLOCKWISE DIRECTION
SHOCK ABSORBER
MOUNTING HOLE
(COUNTERCLOCKWISE)
GU PH D
, I n c.
CLOCKWISE DIRECTION
The -GS, -GT, and -GU options should only be used if the
shock absorber(s) is to be supplied separately from the rotary SHOCK ABSORBER
SHOCK ABSORBER READY CAPS
actuator. These options provide a unit that has provisions for MOUNTING HOLE (CLOCKWISE)
installing hydraulic shock absorbers but have no shock absorbers
included. See pages 3B-12 through 3B-13 for details on unit
stopping capacity with built-in shock absorbers.
NOTE: The shock absorber doubles as the rotation adjustment

on units with rotations greater than 180°. Shock absorbers must be
installed in the rotary actuator prior to operating the unit. Operation absorbers specified by PHD should be used in Series RA Rotary
of units with shock absorber ready options without installed shocks Actuators. The use of any other shock absorbers will affect actuator
can damage the units and void any and all warranties. Only shock performance and life expectancy.

PHD SHOCK KINETIC
SHOCK ABSORBER ENERGY A B ACROSS
BORE ABSORBER THREAD STROKE WEIGHT LOAD MAX. FLATS
SIZE NUMBER TYPE in mm lb kg in-lb Nm in mm in mm
20 56722-01 M12 x 1 .15 3.81 .09 .04 1.1 .12 1.24 31.5 — —
25 56722-02* M14 x 1.5 .25 6.35 .12 .0540 3.1 .35 2.23 56.6 .44 11.1
32 56722-03 M20 x 1.5 .25 6.35 .34 .15 5.0 .57 2.41 61.2 .71 18
40 56722-04* M25 x 1.5 .5 12.7 .67 .3 15.0 1.70 3.38 85.7 .88 22.3
50 56722-05* M25 x 1.5 .5 12.7 .67 .3 29.5 3.33 3.44 87.4 .88 22.3
*These shock absorbers have an adjustment feature. (See startup procedure)
Q10 OUTPUT HUB
B
This option provides an output hub in place of the conventional
HUB
pinion shaft. The hub includes four thru holes counterbored from C CLAMP
one surface and threaded from the other, allowing easy mounting of SCREW
fixturing, tooling, or other actuators requiring a flat surface area. PHD,
Inc.
The hub is manufactured from alloy aluminum and comes
assembled to a specially designed low profile pinion shaft. The hub
can be removed to allow custom machining for specific mounting
needs. The hub hole pattern can be oriented in 22.5° increments.
Separate hubs are available in a kit complete with all hardware. See HUB
chart bottom right.

ØA
D
OUTPUT HUB WITH HOLLOW
Q19 PINION SHAFT
3B
This option provides an output hub with a hollow pinion shaft
in place of the standard pinion shaft. The hub has four thru holes
counterbored from one surface and threaded from the other, Ø H THRU UNIT
allowing easy mounting of fixturing, tooling, or other actuators (–Q19 OPTION ONLY) E
requiring a flat surface area. The pinion shaft is hollow for feeding Ø J DOWEL PIN HOLE
(–Q10 OPTION ONLY)
pneumatic or electrical lines from the back of the rotary actuator to
F THREAD THRU C'BORE
the output hub. The hub is manufactured from alloy aluminum and FROM OPPOSITE SIDE FOR G SHCS
comes assembled to a specially designed low profile pinion shaft.
The hub can be removed to allow custom machining for specific
mounting needs. It can also be rotated in 22.5° rotations. Kinetic
energy ratings are reduced by 10% for this option.
NOTE: Available on 32 mm, 40 mm, and 50 mm units.
BORE SIZE A B C D E F G H J
1.535 .374 .100 .787 .787 8-32 #4 — .1264 x .25 DP
20 mm
[39.0] [9.5] [2.5] [20.0] [20.0] [M4 x 0.7] [M3] [3.21 x 6.4 DP]
1.772 .374 .100 .945 .945 10-32 #6 — .1264 x .25 DP
25 mm
[45.0] [9.5] [2.5] [24.0] [24.0] [M5 x 0.8] [M4] [3.21 x 6.4 DP]
2.165 .492 .100 1.102 1.102 1/4-28 #10 .276 .2514 x .50 DP
32 mm
[55.0] [12.5] [2.5] [28.0] [28.0] [M6 x 1.0] [M4] [7.0] [6.39 x 12.7 DP]
2.717 .492 .100 1.398 1.398 1/4-28 #10 .315 .2514 x .50 DP
40 mm
[69.0] [12.5] [2.5] [35.5] [35.5] [M8 x 1.25] [M6] [8.0] [6.39 x 12.7 DP]
2.953 .748 .100 1.575 1.575 7/16-20 3/8 .394 .2514 x .50 DP
50 mm
[75.0] [19.0] [2.5] [40.0] [40.0] [M10 x 1.5] [M8] [10.0] [6.39 x 12.7 DP]
-Q10 & -Q19 HUB INERTIA TABLE HUB REPLACEMENT KITS

BORE Jm TOTAL HUB WEIGHT BORE FINISHED HUB KIT
SIZE in-lb-sec2 kg-m2 lb kg SIZE IMPERIAL METRIC
20 mm .000043831 4.96 x 10-6 .06 .03 20 mm 57651-2721-1 57658-2771-1
25 mm .000085146 9.63 x 10-6 .08 .04 25 mm 57652-2731-1 57659-2781-1
32 mm .000225389 2.55 x 10-5 .14 .06 32 mm 57653-2741-1 57660-2791-1
40 mm .000731212 8.27 x 10-5 .30 .14 40 mm 57654-2751-1 57661-2801-1
50 mm .001230561 1.39 x 10-4 .42 .19 50 mm 57655-2761-1 57662-2811-1
Rotational mass moment of inertia is based on hub plus
mounting screw.

ROTARY ACTUATOR SELECTION: SERIES RA
To select the appropriate RA rotary actuator, it is crucial to consider 3) Determine the stopping capacity of the actuator by using the
several factors including bearing capacity, torque requirements and equation given below.
stopping capacity of the actuator. The bearing capacities are listed
on page 3B-6. To determine the required torque to rotate the load in KINETIC ENERGY BASIC EQUATION
a given time, the rotational mass moments of inertia, gravity, time
KE = 1/2 Jm ω2 (Fa)
and acceleration must be taken into account. To stop an actuator, all
of the same required information for torque is needed plus kinetic a) Determine the average rotational velocity by using
energy. Follow the steps below to select the appropriate RA equation A.
actuator.
ROTATIONAL VELOCITY EQUATIONS
1) Review pages 3B-6 to make sure RA rotary actuator bearings
can withstand axial and radial bearing loads. EQUATION A
Average Velocity (rad/sec)
2) Determine the torque requirements of the actuator.
Uniformly accelerated from rest
a) Determine Mass Moment of Inertia. rad .0175 x Degrees of Rotation
ω= =
Select the illustration from the application types on the sec Time of Rotation in seconds
3B

necessary to fully describe your application. Using the b) Using Jm from step 2a and velocity from step 3a,
appropriate application equation, calculate the mass calculate the kinetic energy of the application.
mass moment of inertia will be the sum of the individual c) Select an appropriate Fa factor from the table below.
calculations.
UNIT APPLICATION
b) Determine the necessary acceleration.
DESCRIPTION FACTORS (Fa)
2 x (Rotation angle in radians) plain unit 4
Acceleration (α) =
(Time of Rotation in Seconds)2 with cushion 4
with shocks 1.35
.035 x (Rotation angle in degrees)
Acceleration (α) =
d) Use the KE Energy Table below to select appropriate
c) Calculate the required torque. RL actuator.
Select the illustration from the application types on the
appropriate application equation, calculate the mass
torque will be the sum of the individual calculations.
Note: Torque calculations are theoretical, an appropriate
safety factor should be considered. PHD recommends a
minimum safety factor of 2 to account for friction loss,
airline and valve size, and attached accessories.
KINETIC ENERGY TABLE

KE MAX. KE MAX. KE MAX. WITH
BORE PLAIN UNIT WITH CUSHION SHOCK ABSORBER
SIZE in-lb Nm in-lb Nm in-lb Nm
20 mm .21 .0237 .75 .0848 1.10 .1243
25 mm .46 .0519 1.70 .1921 3.10 .3503
32 mm .96 .1085 3.60 .4068 7.10 .8023
40 mm 1.74 .1966 6.75 .7628 15.0 1.695
50 mm 2.13 .2407 8.81 .9955 29.5 3.334
3B-12
ROTARY ACTUATOR SELECTION: SERIES RA
IMPERIAL UNITS:
SF = Safety Factor
METRIC UNITS:
BALANCED LOADS
T = Jm x α x SF
3B
L
k
k
k
2
Jm = Fg x k 2 Fg
2
Fg 1
g 2 Jm =
g
x
4
x ( L3 + k ) 2
Jm =
5
x x k2
g
LOAD ORIENTATION Rectangular Plate Rod

k dim is
radius
of rod
b
Tg = Rotating Vertically
(with gravity)
a
a
2 2 2 2
Jm = Fg x a + b Jm = Fg x a + 3k
T = Rotating Horizontally g 12 g 12
(without gravity)

T = Jm x α x SF 2
T = Jm x α x SF
Mounted off center k dim is Mounted off center
radius
of rod
c Fg2 Fg2
b
k
Fg b Fg1 Fg1
a
a
Fg 2 2
Fg2 (4b2 + 3k2)
(Fg
2 2 2 2
Jm =
g
x k2 Jm = Fg1 x 4a + c + Fg2 x 4b + c
g 12 g 12
Jm =
g1
x (4a + 3k ) +
12 g
x)( 12
)
3B-13
APPLICATION EXAMPLE: SERIES RA ROTARY ACTUATORS
EXAMPLE A-Disk rotating about centerline of unit. Numbers in [ ] are for metric
units and are in mm.

k
IMPERIAL METRIC 1.00
[25.4]
ROTATION ANGLE / TIME 180°/.10 sec 180°/.10 sec
LOAD Aluminum Disk Aluminum Disk k
WEIGHT .236 lb 1.05 N

MASS .107 Kg 1.75
[44.45]
SAFETY FACTOR 2 2
2) Determine torque requirement for the application: b) Using Jm from step 2a and velocity from step 3a, determine
a) Calculate Rotational Mass Moment of Inertia (Jm) using
equations given on page 3B-13. IMPERIAL METRIC
3B
IMPERIAL METRIC KE = .5 x .000234 x 31.52 x 4 KE = .5 x 2.64 x 10-5 x 31.52 x 4

KE = .464 in-lbs KE = .052 N-m
Fg k2 Fg k2
Jm = x Jm = x
g 2 g 2
IF SHOCKS ARE USED:
2 IMPERIAL METRIC
Jm = .236 lb x (.875 in) Jm =
1.05 N
x
(.0222m) 2
KE = 1/2 x Jm x ω2 x Fa KE = 1/2 x Jm x ω2 x Fa
386.4 2 9.81 2
KE = .5 x .000234 x 31.52 x 1.35 KE = .5 x 2.64 x 10-5 x 31.52 x 1.35
Jm = .000234 in-lb-sec2 Jm = 2.64 x 10-5 N-m-sec2 KE = .157 in-lbs KE = .018 N-m
When the recommended shocks are used, three times the KE can
b) Determine required acceleration of the load: be handled, or conversely, a smaller unit can be used.
c) Use the KE Energy table on page 3B-12 to select the

α = .035 x rotational angle (deg)2 appropriate RL actuator. The following units satisfy the
[rotational time (sec)]
requirements. 32 mm plain, 32 mm with shock pad,
α = .035 x 180° = 630 rad/sec2 or 25 mm with cushions.
(.1 sec)2
IMPERIAL METRIC
T = Jm x α x SF T = Jm x α x 2
T = .000234 x 630 x 2 = .29 in-lbs T = 2.64 x 10-5 x 630 x 2 = .03 N-m
Review torque chart on page 3B-6 for 87 psi [6 bar] to select

3) Determine the stopping capacity of the actuator for the

application:

on page 3B-12.
rotation angle (deg)
ω = rad/sec = .0175 x
rotational time (sec)
ω = .0175 x 180° = 31.5 rad/sec

.1 sec
3B-14
APPLICATION EXAMPLE: SERIES RA ROTARY ACTUATORS
EXAMPLE B-Combination of rectangular plate mounted on Numbers in [ ] are for metric
center and a point load mounted off center. units and are in mm.

6" [152.4] (a)
IMPERIAL METRIC 2"

[50.8]
ROTATION ANGLE / TIME 180°/.5 sec 180°/.5 sec (b)
RECTANGULAR PLATE Steel Plate Steel Plate
1lb
WEIGHT 1.698 lb 7.55 N 2" [4.45 N]
[50.8]
MASS .77 Kg (k)
POINT LOAD 1 lb 4.45 N
(2" off center) (50.8 mm off center)
SAFETY FACTOR 2 2
2) Determine torque requirement for the application: RECTANGULAR PLATE

IMPERIAL METRIC
a) Calculate Rotational Mass Moment of Inertia (Jm) using T = Jm x α x SF T = Jm x α x SF
3B
equations given on page 3B-13.
T = .0146 x 25.2 x 2 = .74 in-lbs T = .00166 x 25.2 x 2 = .084 N-m
POINT LOAD
Total T = 4.5 + .74 = 5.24 in-lbs Total T = .51 + .084 = .594 N-m
IMPERIAL METRIC
Fg Fg
Jm = x k2 Jm = g x k2 Review torque chart on page 3B-6 for 87 psi [6 bar] to select
g
Jm = 1 lb 4.45 N
x (2 in)2 Jm = x (.0508 m)2 3) Determine the stopping capacity of the actuator for the
386.4 9.81 application:
Jm = .0104 in-lb-sec2 Jm = .00117 N-m-sec2
on page 3B-12.
RECTANGULAR PLATE
ω = .0175 x rotation angle (deg) ω = .0175 x 180° = 6.3 rad/sec
IMPERIAL METRIC rotational time (sec) .5 sec
Fg a2+b2 Fg a2+b2
Jm = Jm = g x 12
g x 12 b) Using Jm from step 2a and velocity from step 3a, determine
2 2
Jm = 7.55 x (.1524) +(.0508)
2 2
Jm = 1.698 x 6 +2
386.4 12 9.81 12 IMPERIAL METRIC
2 2 KE = 1/2 x Jm x ω 2 x Fa KE = 1/2 x Jm x ω 2 x Fa
Jm = .0146 in-lb-sec Jm = .00165 N-m-sec
KE = .5 x .025 x 6.32 x 4 KE = .5 x .00282 x 6.32 x 4
KE = 1.98 in-lbs KE = .224 N-m
Total Jm Total Jm
= .0146+.0104=.025 in-lb-sec2 = .00165+.00117=.00282N-m-sec2
IF SHOCKS ARE USED:
IMPERIAL METRIC
b) Determine required acceleration of the load:
α = .035 x rotational angle (deg) KE = .5 x .025 x 6.32 x 1.35 KE = .5 x .00282 x 6.32 x 1.35
[time (sec)]2 KE = .66 in-lbs KE = .076 N-m
α = .035 x 180° = 25.2 rad/sec2
(.5 sec)2 When the recommended shocks are used, three times the KE can
be handled, or conversly, a smaller rotary unit can be used.
c) Use the KE Energy table on page 3B-12 to select the
POINT LOAD
appropriate RA actuator. The following units satisfy the
IMPERIAL METRIC
requirements: 50 mm plain, 32 mm with cushions, or 20 with
T = [(Jm x α)+(Fg x k)] x 2 T = [(Jm x α)+(Fg x k)] x SF shock absorbers.
T = [(.0140 x 25.2) + (1 x 2)] x 2 T = [(.00117 x 25.2) + (4.45 x .0508)] x 2
T = 4.5 in-lbs T = .51 N-m
3B-15
NOTES
3B
3B-16
ROTARY ACTUATORS INDEX:
Miniature
(0180 & 0183 Series)
MINIATURE, AIR/OIL TANDEM, AND MULTI-POSITION Pages 3C-2 to 3C-6
Series 1000-8000
Pages 3C-8 to 3C-12
Specialty Actuators Provide Solutions to Air/Oil Tandem

Unique Rotary Motion Requirements Pages 3C-13 to 3C-19
Multi-Position
Engineering Data
3C
Plumbing Schematics
SERIES 1000-8000 Start-up Procedure

Page 3C-34
Options
SERIES 2000-8000
MINIATURE AIR/OIL TANDEM
ROTARY
ACTUATORS
SERIES 2000-8000
MULTI-POSITION
3C-1
ORDERING DATA: MINIATURE ROTARY ACTUATORS
UNITS WITH IMPERIAL SHAFTS AND KEYWAYS
TO ORDER SPECIFY:
Series, Size, Type, Design No.,
Options, and Seals.
SIZE DESIGN NO. SEALS

50 - 1/2" [12 mm] Bore 1 - 018x75 1 - Buna-N (standard)
75 - 3/4" [19 mm] Bore 3 - 018x50 2 - Fluoro-Elastomer
MODEL NUMBER 018 0 75 1 - 1 - 0 1

3C
SERIES NUMBER FOR PORT & MTG. HOLE TYPE TYPE OPTIONS
IMPERIAL METRIC POSITION 1 - Single Rack 0 - No Sensor
0 5 2 Position Actuator 2 - Double Rack 3 - Sensor Transducer with
3 8 3 Position Actuator -(Not T - Tandem Transition Plate
available on Size 50) NOTE: 018x50,
018375, and 018875
are available in -2 NOTES:
double rack only. 1) Sensor must be used with a PHD Set Point
Module. See Switches and Sensors section
for information and ordering data.
UNITS WITH METRIC SHAFTS AND KEYWAYS

TO ORDER SPECIFY:
Series, Size, Type, Design No.,
Options, and Seals.
SIZE DESIGN NO. SEALS
50 - 1/2" [12 mm] Bore 1 - 018x75x 1 - Buna-N (standard)
75 - 3/4" [19 mm] Bore 3 - 0186502 2 - Fluoro-Elastomer
MODEL NUMBER 018 6 75 1 - 1 - 0 1
SERIES NUMBER FOR PORT & MTG. HOLE TYPE TYPE OPTIONS
IMPERIAL METRIC POSITION 1 - Single Rack 0 - No Sensor
— 6 2 Position Actuator 2 - Double Rack 3 - Sensor Transducer with
— 9 3 Position Actuator -(Not T - Tandem Transition Plate
available on Size 50) NOTE: 018x50, and
018975 are available
in -2 double rack only. NOTES:
1) Sensor must be used with a PHD Set Point
Module. See Switches and Sensors section
for information and ordering data.
3C-2
www.phdinc.com/018x CAT-03 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
MINIATURE ROTARY ACTUATORS:
SERIES 018x502 & 018x75x
BENEFITS UNIT 018x752
■ PHD Miniature Rotary Actuators provide an infinite choice of

rotation between 0 and 180° in a very small package which is
ideal for small part orientation and turnover.
■ Two bore sizes, single and double rack, air-oil tandem, and 3
position models are offered for a wide range of application
requirements.
■ Standard external angle adjustments provide easy adjustment

of rotation between 0 and 180°.
■ Zero backlash at ends of rotation provide precise positioning of

attached load.
■ One piece pinion gear with sealed ball bearings give maximum
3C
output shaft support, low friction, and long unit life.
■ Built-in flow controls are standard on most models for precise

control of rotation speed.
■ Optional Hall Effect Sensor/Set Point Module is available for

sensing multiple position throughout rotation. OUTPUT TORQUES TO 33 in-lb [3.7 Nm]
SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS 018x50 018x75
PISTON SEALS (1 Per Piston) Block Vee (2 Per Piston) Block Vee
PISTONS Part of the Rack Free Floating Aluminum
PINION SHAFT One Piece Alloy Steel
RACK Alloy Steel
END CAPS — Zinc Plated Steel
BODY Hardcoated Aluminum
BEARINGS (2) Steel Ball Bearings
PORTS 10-32 [M5 x .8] with Barb Fittings 1/8 NPT [1/8 BSP]
LUBRICATION Permanently Lubricated for Non-Lube Air
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT 0° to 180° (Fully Adjustable)
BACKLASH 0° at Both End Positions
ROTATION 180° Total
FLOW CONTROLS Not Available Built-in Standard*
*Not available on 018375, 018875, or 018975 3 position units.
THEORETICAL TORQUE in-lb/psi [Nm/bar]

MODEL
0180502 0180751 0180752 018075T 0183752
.065 [.09] .11 [.18] .22 [.36] .11 [.18] .11 [.18]
3C-3
INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION CAT-03 www.phdinc.com/018x
3C
BASIC DIMENSIONS
3C-4
SERIES 018x75x & 018x752 UNITS
4.750 [121] ANGLE LIMITING SEGMENT

AUXILIARY MTG LOCATION
2.375 [60.5] LIMITS ROTATION TO 45° FROM
.500 .500 .875 2.000 [50.8] .375 [9.53] SHAFT STOP PIN MIDPOINT OF ROTATION
[12.7] [12.7] 2X REF CAP AREA [22.2]
2.000 1.500
[38.1] 10-32 THREAD x .312
[50.8]
(800) 624-8511
[M5 x .8] DP
www.phdinc.com/018x
FOR SHAFT
1.000 DETAILS SEE
[25.4] 2.000 [50.8] 10-24 [M5 x .8] PAGE 3C-5 .250 1.500 10-24 [M8 x .5] ANGLE LIMITING SEGMENTS ALLOW
THREAD x .250 [6.3] DP [6.3] [38.1] THREAD x .375 [10] DP 180° MAX ROTATION
2.500 [63.4]
4X FRONT & BACK 4X TOP & BOTTOM 0° MIN ROTATION
SINGLE RACK UNIT DOUBLE RACK UNIT

SERIES 018x751 SERIES 018x752
4.250 [107.9] 4.250 [107.6]
2X 1/8 NPT 2X 1/8 NPT
.810 [1/8 BSP] 2.125 [53.97] .810 [1/8 BSP] 2.125 [53.8]
[20.6] 1 [20.6]
2 4
CAT-03
3
.500
[12.7]
.310
[7.9] 1.000 .190 1.500
[25.4] SQ [4.8] [38.1]
AIR/OIL TANDEM UNIT

SERIES 018x75T 1.000 .687 .750
.188 [25.4] [17.4] [19]
All dimensions are reference only unless specifically toleranced.

.500 [4.8]
.810 [12.7]
[20.6] CHECK VALVE FITTING
2X 1/8 NPT 2.000 RESERVOIR ASSEMBLY IS
2.125 [53.9] [1/8 BSP] [50.8] INCLUDED WITH UNIT AND
1 SHIPPED WITH 3 FEET
2.125 1.000 [1 m] OF FLEXIBLE TUBING
[53.9] [25.4] 3.62
[92]
2 4
1.000 1.000
[25.4] [25.4]
.937
2 4 2X THRU HOLE [23.8]
FOR #8 [M4] SCREW
SOLUTIONS FOR
3
.310 1.000
[7.9] [25.4]
NOTES:
DIMENSIONS: SERIES 018x75x MINIATURE ROTARY ACTUATORS
1) ALL DETAILS SHOW UNITS AT MID-ROTATION

DIMENSIONS: SERIES 018x752 3 POSITION MINIATURE
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
[25.4]
PORT PRESSURIZED - C
1.000
The PHD Three Position Rotary Actuator yields three output
FULL CW POSITION
ANGLE ADJUSTMENTS
shaft positions. Both the extreme positions and the midposition can
be adjusted in the field allowing a total rotation from 0° to 180° with
C the midpoint anywhere between. Pressurizing port C provides full
A
counterclockwise rotation (position I). Pressurizing ports B1 and B2
at the same time causes the unit to rotate to position II and to hold
III
4.250 [107.06]
at that position. The racks are trapped by the piston and rods (B1
and B2) and hold the pinion from rotating, creating the positive
PORTS PRESSURIZED
midposition. The midpoint adjustment stops allow the midpoint to
2.125 [53.8]
R°
be set by changing the lengths that each piston and rod can stroke.
B1 & B2
II
Position III is obtained by pressurizing port A driving the pinion
T°
shaft to a full clockwise position.
B1
B2
I°
Output positions can be selected in any sequence allowing the
actuator to stop at or pass by the midposition.
I
PORT PRESSURIZED - A
FULL CCW POSITION
VIEW FROM FRONT OF UNIT
3C
FOR LOCATION OF THIRD POSITION
2X ADJUSTMENT CONTROL KNOB
MIDPOINT
C B1 ADJUSTMENT
STOPS
A B2
II
LOCKING SCREWS
4
HOLD MIDPOINT
ADJUSTMENT IN PLACE
[25.4]
1.000
1
I III
2
[7.9]
.310
SHAFT DETAIL FOR 018x75x

DIMENSION
SERIES A B C
.906 [23]
DIA TYP
018075x + .000
.375 - .001 .375 204
018375x
Woodruff
018575x + .000
1.577 [40]
2.500 [63.5]MAX
9.53 - .025 [9.53] Keyway

018875x
018675x + .0000
.3939 - .0003
018975x 3 mm SQ
—
x 16 mm LG
+ .000
10 - .007
.750
[19]
1) ALL DETAILS SHOW UNITS AT MID-ROTATION
B
5.000 [127]
AØ AØ
MULTI-POSITION UNIT
2.375 [60.3]
SERIES 018x752
C KEYWAY C KEYWAY
IMPERIAL SHAFTS METRIC SHAFTS

NOTES:
.500
[12.7]
All dimensions are reference only unless specifically toleranced. 3C-5

3C
3C-6
DOUBLE RACK UNITS
SERIES 0180502
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/018x
3.000 [76.2]
1.500 [38.1] .750 ANGLE LIMITING SEGMENT
1.500 [38.1] .312 [7.9] AUXILIARY MTG LOCATION.
2.219 [56.4] [19]
.594 LIMITS ROTATION TO 45° FROM
1.109 [15] 2X 10-32 [M5 x .8] PORT - MIDPOINT OF ROTATION
[28.2] BARB FITTING
FOR 1/16 [1.6] ID TUBE SUPPLIED
1.500 .750
[38.1] 2 4 6-32 THREAD
[19] x .250 [M3 x 6] DP
.750
[19]
SEE DETAIL 3
BELOW
1.500 [38.1] .250 1.000
2.000 [50.8] 8-32 THREAD x .187 [5] [6.3] [25.4] 8-32 THREAD x .250 [M4 x 6] DP
[M4 x .7] DP 4X TOP & BOTTOM
4X FRONT & BACK ANGLE LIMITING SEGMENTS
ALLOW 180° MAX ROTATION
SHAFT KEYWAY: SHOWN AT MID-ROTATION - WOODRUFF KEY IS SUPPLIED WITH ALL ACTUATORS 0° MIN ROTATION
CAT-03
ROTATION: 180° MAXIMUM
PORT POSITIONS: INDICATED BY CIRCLED NUMBERS
PORT CONTROLS: NOT AVAILABLE ON SERIES 0183752, 0188752 & 018x502 UNITS. PORT CONTROLS ARE
STANDARD ON ALL OTHER ACTUATORS.
MTG. HOLES: CENTERED ON CENTERLINE OF ACTUATOR BODY
DIMENSION
B SERIES A B C
+ .000
.250 - .001 .312 203
AØ AØ 018050

Woodruff
018550 + .000
6.35 - .025 [7.92] Keyway
+ .0000
.2362 - .0003
2 mm SQ
C KEYWAY C KEYWAY 018650 —
+ .000 x 14 mm LG
6.0 - .007
IMPERIAL SHAFTS METRIC SHAFTS
NOTE: NUMBERS IN [ ] ARE FOR METRIC UNITS AND ARE IN mm.
SOLUTIONS FOR
DIMENSIONS: SERIES 018x502 MINIATURE ROTARY ACTUATORS
NOTES
3C
3C-7
3C
UNITS WITH IMPERIAL SHAFTS AND KEYWAY
3C-8
TO ORDER SPECIFY:
Type, Design No., Series, Angle of Rotation, and Options.
IMPERIAL
SERIES PORT CONTROL©
1 (000) 1" Bore Single Rack
2 (000) 1" Bore Double Rack
3 (000) 1-3/8" Bore Single Rack
(800) 624-8511
4 (000) 1-3/8" Bore Double Rack BUILT-IN METER OUT ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
www.phdinc.com/18000r
DESIGN NO. 5 (000) 2" Bore Single Rack FLOW CONTROL VALVE A - Angle adjustment both ends
1 - Imperial - Ports and mounting holes are imperial. 6 (000) 2" Bore Double Rack P - Flow control both directions A1 - Angle adjustment clockwise 30°
5 - Metric - Ports and mounting holes are metric. 7 (000) 3" Bore Single Rack P1 - Flow control clockwise A2 - Angle adjustment counterclockwise 30°
Pinion shafts and keyway are imperial. 8 (000) 3" Bore Double Rack P2 - Flow control counterclockwise (20° for Series 8000)
R1 1 A 2 180 - P - D - A - K-M-V
TYPE ANGLE OF ROTATION CUSHION OR SHOCK PAD OPTIONS

IMPERIAL METRIC STANDARD ANGLES D - Cushions both directions C - Cross Key Pinion Shaft
CAT-03
R11A - Single Shaft Ext. R15A - Single Shaft Ext. 45°, 90°, 180°, 270°, 360°, and 450° D1 - Cushion clockwise E - Magnetic Piston for Hall Effect Switch
150 psi Air Max. 10 bar Air Max. For other available rotations, D2 - Cushion counterclockwise G - Shaft Seal both sides
R21A - Double Shaft Ext. R25A - Double Shaft Ext. consult PHD. B - Shock Pads both directions H - Hollow Pinion Shaft (not available on type R21)
150 psi Air Max. 10 bar Air Max. B1 - Shock Pad clockwise I - Port Position 1 on top rack
R11H - Single Shaft Ext. R15H - Single Shaft Ext. B2 - Shock Pad counterclockwise Port Position 3 on bottom rack
1500 psi Hyd. Max. 100 bar Hyd. Max. (Available on Series 2000, 4000, 6000, and 8000 only.)
(Cushions and Shock Pads are
R21H - Double Shaft Ext. R25H - Double Shaft Ext. J - Hall Sensor (Set Point Module is ordered separately)
not available on the same end of
1500 psi Hyd. Max. 100 bar Hyd. Max. for rotations not exceeding 180°
actuator. Shock Pads are not
available for Hydraulic use.) K - Preload Keyway Pinion Shaft
NOTES: PROXIMITY SWITCH L - Counterclockwise Unidirectional Clutch
1) Sensor must be used with a PHD Set Point Module. MOUNTING BRACKETS M- Magnetic Piston for Reed Switch
See Switches and Sensors section for information SERIES SIZE NO. Options may affect unit length.
N - Pilot Valve Actuator (PVA)
and ordering data. See unit dimension and options O - Ports in Position 1*
1000 & 2000 -32 ! pages for adders.
2) Mounting flanges must be ordered separately. Q - Ports in Position 3*
3000 & 4000 -34 R - Clockwise Unidirectional Clutch
3) SAE Ports available. Consult PHD for sizes.
5000 & 6000 -38 S - SAE Ports (Hydraulic Units Only)
7000 & 8000 -39 T - Ports in Position 4
See Switches and Sensors V - Fluoro-Elastomer Seals
section for complete W- Close Tolerance Rotation, +30 minutes, -0
ordering information.
Z1 - Electroless Nickel Plate
SOLUTIONS FOR
ORDERING DATA: SERIES 1000-8000 ROTARY ACTUATORS
* Available on Series 1000, 3000, 5000, and 7000 only.
UNITS WITH METRIC SHAFTS AND KEYWAY METRIC
TO ORDER SPECIFY:
Type, Design No., Series, Angle of Rotation, and Options.
SERIES PORT CONTROL©
SOLUTIONS FOR
1 (000) 1" Bore Single Rack
3 (000) 1-3/8" Bore Single Rack
4 (000) 1-3/8" Bore Double Rack BUILT-IN METER OUT ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
5 (000) 2" Bore Single Rack FLOW CONTROL VALVE A - Angle adjustment both ends
DESIGN NO. 6 (000) 2" Bore Double Rack P - Flow control both directions A1 - Angle adjustment clockwise 30°
6 - Metric - Ports and mounting holes, pinion 7 (000) 3" Bore Single Rack P1 - Flow control clockwise A2 - Angle adjustment counterclockwise 30°
shafts and keyway are metric. 8 (000) 3" Bore Double Rack P2 - Flow control counterclockwise (20° for Series 8000)
R1 6 A 2 180 - P - D - A - M-V
CAT-03
TYPE CUSHION OR SHOCK PAD OPTIONS
METRIC D - Cushions both directions E - Magnetic Piston for Hall Effect Switch
R16A - Single Shaft Ext. ANGLE OF ROTATION
STANDARD ANGLES D1 - Cushion clockwise I - Port Position 1 on top rack
10 bar Air Max. D2 - Cushion counterclockwise Port Position 3 on bottom rack
R26A - Double Shaft Ext. 45°, 90°, 180°, 270°, 360°, and 450°
For other available rotations, B - Shock Pads both directions (Available on Series 2000, 4000, 6000, and 8000 only.)
10 bar Air Max. B1 - Shock Pad clockwise M - Magnetic Piston for Reed Switch
R16H - Single Shaft Ext. consult PHD.
B2 - Shock Pad counterclockwise O - Ports in Position 1*
100 bar Hyd. Max. Q - Ports in Position 3*
R26H - Double Shaft Ext. (Cushions and Shock Pads are
not available on the same end of T - Ports in Position 4
100 bar Hyd. Max. V - Fluoro-Elastomer Seals
actuator. Shock Pads are not
available for Hydraulic use.) W - Close Tolerance Rotation, +30 minutes, -0
NOTES: PROXIMITY SWITCH Z1 - Electroless Nickel Plate
1) Sensor must be used with a PHD Set Point Module. MOUNTING BRACKETS
See Switches and Sensors section for information * Available on Series 1000, 3000, 5000, and 7000 only.
SERIES SIZE NO. Options may affect unit length.
and ordering data. See unit dimension and options
1000 & 2000 -32
2) Mounting flanges must be ordered separately. ! pages for adders.
3000 & 4000 -34
5000 & 6000 -38
7000 & 8000 -39
See Switches and Sensors
section for complete
(800) 624-8511
ORDERING DATA: SERIES 1000-8000 ROTARY ACTUATORS
3C-9
3C
ROTARY ACTUATORS: SERIES 1000-8000
BENEFITS
■ PHD Series 1000-8000 Rotary Actuators are pneumatically or
hydraulically powered providing output torques up to
31,800 in-lb [3595 Nm].
■ Rugged design and construction makes these actuators ideal

for heavy duty service in tough working environments.
■ Four bore sizes are available in single and double rack models
with standard rotations from 45° to 450°.
■ Free floating pistons with rack and pinion design eliminates

binding for low breakaway and long unit life.
■ Sealed shaft ball bearings provide long life and maximum shaft
stability for heavy payloads.
3C
■ Available with a wide range of options including built-in flow OUTPUT TORQUES TO 31,800 in-lb [3595 Nm]
controls, cushions, angle adjustments, shock pads, and pinion
shaft options for specifying the exact actuator for your
application.
■ Simple construction allows easy field repairability.
TYPE
SPECIFICATIONS R1xA & R2xA R1xH & R2xH
PISTON SEALS (3 Per Piston) Block Vee with Back-up Ring
PISTONS Free Floating Aluminum
TIERODS High Tensile Steel
TUBE SEALS Square Cut
PINION SHAFTS One Piece Alloy Steel
RACK Alloy Steel
END CAPS Zinc Plated Alloy Steel
TUBES Hardcoated Aluminum Hardcoated Aluminum on Series 1000-4000
— Honed Steel on Series 5000-8000
PORTS NPT [BSP]
LUBRICATION Permanent for Non-Lube Air —
150 psi [10 bar] Air Max 1500 psi [100 bar] Hyd. Max.
STANDARD ROTATIONS 45°, 90°, 180°, 270°, 360°, 450°
OPTIONS Port Controls®, Cushions, Angle Adjustment,
Magnetic Pistons, Fluoro-Elastomer Seals

SERIES
1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000
.38 .77 1.1 2.2 2.3 4.7 10.6 21.2
[.63] [1.28] [1.83] [3.66] [3.82] [7.82] [17.61] [35.21]
3C-10
www.phdinc.com/18000r CAT-03 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
ZA MAX A + (T° x B) ZA MAX
IMPERIAL
Y + (T° x Z)
PA O
H G NB +.001 DIA
-.000 U
F 1
SOLUTIONS FOR
OPTIONAL
X NPT ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
W KEYWAY
I II 2 4
JA C2 C1 3
C V DIA Q
C/2 L KA SQ III IV 2 4 SPECIFIED BY R2xx

WHEN ORDERING
E A R
E M THREAD 3
4X EACH FRONT,
D BACK & BOTTOM S TA
LETTER DIMENSION
CAT-03
SERIES A B C D E F G H JA KA L M NB O PA Q R S TA U V W X Y Z ZA
1000 & 2000 5.698 .0174 3.000 2.000 1.500 .250 .500 0.00 .750 1.375 1.437 1/4-20 x .312 DP 1.125 x .056 DP 2.000 .875 2.000 .500 .250 1.500 .312 .4998/.5003 1/8 x 1/16 x .625 1/8 2.849 .0087 1.125
3000 & 4000 7.906 .026 4.250 3.000 2.000 .344 .688 .250 1.156 1.875 2.094 5/16-18 x .500 DP 2.000 x .039 DP 3.000 1.875 3.000 .625 .500 2.000 .562 .8748/.8753 3/16 x 3/32 x 1.500 1/4 3.953 .013 1.500
5000 & 6000 9.126 .026 5.000 4.000 2.500 .375 .750 .203 1.156 2.250 2.281 3/8-16 x .625 DP 2.1654 x .052 DP 3.000 1.875 3.500 .750 .500 2.000 .375 1.124/1.125 1/4 x 1/8 x 1.500 1/4 4.563 .013 1.875
7000 & 8000 12.160 .052 8.000 5.000 3.000 .469 1.062 .437 1.875 3.500 3.625 3/4-10 x 1.250 DP 3.3465 x .120 DP 5.000 3.500 5.000 1.500 1.250 2.500 .750 1.749/1.750 3/8 x 3/16 x 3.000 3/8 6.080 .026 2.875
OPTION LOCATION REFERENCE QUICK REFERENCE FOR: A + (T° x B)

LETTER OPTION PORT & NEEDLE LOCATIONS DEGREE OF ROTATION
REFERENCED BY TUBE NUMBER REFERENCED BY CIRCLED NUMBERS SERIES 45 90 180 270 360 450
ACTUATOR -A -B -D -P STANDARD -O -Q -T 1000 & 2000 6.481 7.264 8.830 10.396 11.962 13.528
TYPE -A1 -A2 -B1 -B2 -D1 -D2 -P1 -P2 -M -E -N PORT -P -D PORT -P -D PORT -P -D PORT -P -D 3000 & 4000 9.076 10.246 12.586 14.926 17.266 19.606

R1xA & R2xA II I II I II I II I I & II I & II I & II 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 2 2 4 1 1 5000 & 6000 10.296 11.466 13.806 16.146 18.486 20.826
R1xH & R2xH II I N/A N/A II I II I I & II I & II N/A 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 2 2 4 1 1 7000 & 8000 14.500 16.840 21.520 26.200 30.880 35.560
SHAFT KEYWAY: SHOWN AT MID-ROTATION

PORT POSITION: INDICATED BY CIRCLED NUMBERS
-O & -Q AVAILABLE ON SERIES 1000, 3000, 5000, & 7000 ONLY T°
TUBES III & IV: INCLUDED ON SERIES 2000, 4000, 6000, & 8000 UNITS ONLY
DIMENSIONS: SERIES 1000-8000 ROTARY ACTUATORS
MTG. HOLES: CENTERED ON CENTERLINE OF ACTUATOR BODY PORT PRESSURIZED - FULL CCW POSITION PORT PRESSURIZED - FULL CW POSITION
CUSHIONS: SERIES 1000 & 2000 ACTUATORS C1 ON SERIES 1000, 3000, 5000, & 7000 I II C2 ON SERIES 1000, 3000, 5000, & 7000
ADD 1/2" TO RESPECTIVE “A” AND “Y” DIMENSIONS FOR EACH CUSHION OR C1 & E ON SERIES 2000, 4000, 6000, & 8000 OR C2 & A ON SERIES 2000, 4000, 6000, & 8000
(800) 624-8511
3C-11
3C
3C
3C-12
METRIC
Y + (T° x Z)
PA O
H G NB +.025 DIA
-.000 U
F 1
OPTIONAL
X BSP ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
W KEYWAY
I II 2 4
(800) 624-8511
JA
C2 C1 3
C V DIA Q
C/2 L KA SQ III IV 2 4 SPECIFIED BY R2xx

WHEN ORDERING
E A R
E M THREAD 3
4X EACH FRONT,
D BACK & BOTTOM S TA
LETTER DIMENSION IMPERIAL SHAFTS* METRIC SHAFTS*

SERIES A B C D E F G H JA KA L M NB O PA Q R S TA U V W V W X Y Z ZA
1000 & 2000 145 0.44 76 51 38.1 6 13 0 19 35 36 M6 x 1.0 x 8 28.58 x 1.4 DP 50.8 22 50.8 13 6 38.1 8 12.69/12.71 3.15 x 1.59 x 16 12.00/11.97 4 x 2.5 x 15 1/8 72 0.22 29
CAT-03
3000 & 4000 201 0.66 108 76 50.8 9 17 6 29 48 53 M8 x 1.0 x 13 50.80 x 1.0 DP 76.2 48 76.2 16 13 50.8 14 22.22/22.23 4.75 x 2.36 x 38 22.00/21.96 6 x 3.5 x 32 1/4 100 0.33 38
5000 & 6000 232 0.66 127 102 63.5 10 19 5 29 57 58 M10 x 1.5 x 16 55.00 x 1.3 DP 76.2 48 88.9 19 13 50.8 10 28.55/28.58 6.35 x 3.18 x 38 28.00/27.96 8 x 5 x 40 1/4 116 0.33 48
7000 & 8000 302 1.33 203 127 76.2 12 27 11 48 89 92 M20 x 2.5 x 32 85.00 x 3.0 DP 127.0 89 127.0 38 32 63.5 19 44.42/44.45 9.53 x 2.36 x 78 44.00/43.96 12 x 5 x 56 3/8 154 0.66 73

ACTUATOR -A -B -D -P STANDARD -O -Q -T 1000 & 2000 164.6 184.5 224.3 264.1 303.8 343.6
TYPE -A1 -A2 -B1 -B2 -D1 -D2 -P1 -P2 -M -E -N PORT -P -D PORT -P -D PORT -P -D PORT -P -D 3000 & 4000 230.5 260.2 319.7 379.1 438.6 498.0
R1xA & R2xA II I II I II I II I I & II I & II I & II 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 2 2 4 1 1 5000 & 6000 261.5 291.1 351.4 410.1 469.5 529.0
R1xH & R2xH II I — — II I II I I & II I & II N/A 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 2 2 4 1 1 7000 & 8000 368.3 427.7 548.0 665.5 784.4 903.2

* BOTH IMPERIAL AND METRIC SHAFT OPTIONS AVAILABLE ON METRIC BODY
(IMPERIAL SHAFT = DESIGN 5, AND METRIC SHAFT = DESIGN 6).
NUMBERS ARE FOR METRIC UNITS AND ARE IN mm.

-O & -Q AVAILABLE ON SERIES 1000, 3000, 5000, & 7000 ONLY T°
TUBES III & IV: INCLUDED ON SERIES 2000, 4000, 6000, & 8000 UNITS ONLY
PORT PRESSURIZED - FULL CCW POSITION PORT PRESSURIZED - FULL CW POSITION
DIMENSIONS: SERIES 1000-8000 ROTARY ACTUATORS

C1 ON SERIES 1000, 3000, 5000, & 7000
CUSHIONS: SERIES 1000 & 2000 ACTUATORS I II C2 ON SERIES 1000, 3000, 5000, & 7000
OR C1 & E ON SERIES 2000, 4000, 6000, & 8000 OR C2 & A ON SERIES 2000, 4000, 6000, & 8000
ADD 13 mm TO RESPECTIVE “A” AND “Y” DIMENSIONS FOR EACH CUSHION
SOLUTIONS FOR
UNITS WITH IMPERIAL SHAFTS AND KEYWAY IMPERIAL
TO ORDER SPECIFY:
Type, Design No., Series,
Angle of Rotation, and Options.
SOLUTIONS FOR
SERIES
DESIGN NO. 4 (000) 1-3/8" Bore Double Rack CUSHION ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
3 - Imperial - Ports and mounting holes are imperial 6 (000) 2" Bore Double Rack D - Cushions both directions A - Angle adjustment both ends
8 - Metric - Ports and mounting holes are metric. 8 (000) 3" Bore Double Rack D1 - Cushion clockwise A1 - Angle adjustment clockwise 30°
Pinon shaft and keyway are imperial. (Oil Section is 2" Bore) D2 - Cushion counterclockwise A2 - Angle adjustment counterclockwise 30°
3 R1 3 R - 2 180 - 90 - D - A - M-V
CAT-03
3 ROTARY POSITIONS TYPE ANGLE OF ROTATION OPTIONS
Use this digit for 3 IMPERIAL METRIC STANDARD ANGLES C - Cross Key Pinion Shaft
Position Tandems only. R13R - Single Shaft Ext. R18R - Single Shaft Ext. 45°, 90°, 180°, 270°, E - Magnetic Piston for Hall Effect Switch
Air/Oil Tandem Air/Oil Tandem 360°, and 450° G - Shaft Seal both sides
R23R - Double Shaft Ext. R28R - Double Shaft Ext. For other available H - Hollow Pinion Shaft (not available on type R23R)
Air/Oil Tandem Air/Oil Tandem rotations, consult PHD. I - Port Position 1 top rack
Port Position 3 bottom rack
J - Hall Sensor (Set Point Module is ordered
NOTE: Sensor must be used with a PHD PORT CONTROL© PROXIMITY SWITCH separately) for units not exceeding 180°
Set Point Module. See Switches and MOUNTING BRACKETS ANGLE OF ROTATION K - Preload Keyway Pinion Shaft
Sensors section for information and SERIES SIZE NO. FROM POSITION I L - Counterclockwise Unidirectional Clutch
ordering data. TO POSITION II M - Magnetic Piston for Reed Switch
2000 -32
BUILT-IN METER OUT Use this digit for 3 N - Pilot Valve Actuator (PVA)
4000 -34
FLOW CONTROL VALVE Position Tandems only. R - Clockwise Unidirectional Clutch
6000 -38 T - Port in Position 4
Port Control is standard on 8000 -39
all Air/Oil Tandem Actuators. V - Fluoro-Elastomer Seals
Options may affect unit length. See Switches and Sensors
See unit dimension and options W - Close Tolerance Rotation, +30 minutes, -0
! pages for adders. section for complete Y - Tandem Cap rotated 180°
Z1- Electroless Nickel Plate
ORDERING DATA: AIR/OIL TANDEM ROTARY ACTUATORS
(800) 624-8511
3C-13
3C
3C
3C-14
UNITS WITH METRIC SHAFTS AND KEYWAY METRIC
TO ORDER SPECIFY:
(800) 624-8511
Type, Design No., Series,
Angle of Rotation, and Options.
SERIES
4 (000) 1-3/8" Bore Double Rack CUSHION ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
DESIGN NO. 6 (000) 2" Bore Double Rack D - Cushions both directions A - Angle adjustment both ends
9 - Metric - Ports, mounting holes, pinion 8 (000) 3" Bore Double Rack D1 - Cushion clockwise A1 - Angle adjustment clockwise 30°
shaft and keyway are metric. (Oil Section is 2" Bore) D2 - Cushion counterclockwise A2 - Angle adjustment counterclockwise 30°
3 R1 9 R - 2 180 - 90 - D - A - M-V
CAT-03
3 ROTARY POSITIONS TYPE ANGLE OF ROTATION ANGLE OF ROTATION OPTIONS
Use this digit for 3 R19R - Single Shaft Ext. STANDARD ANGLES FROM POSITION I E - Magnetic Piston for Hall Effect Switch
Position Tandems only. Air/Oil Tandem 45°, 90°, 180°, 270°, TO POSITION II I - Port Position 1 top rack
R29R - Double Shaft Ext. 360°, and 450° Use this digit for 3 Port Position 3 bottom rack
Air/Oil Tandem For other available Position Tandems only. M - Magnetic Piston for Reed Switch
rotations, consult PHD. T - Port in Position 4
V - Fluoro-Elastomer Seals
W - Close Tolerance Rotation, +30 minutes, -0
NOTE: Sensor must be used with a PHD Set PORT CONTROL© PROXIMITY SWITCH Y - Tandem Cap rotated 180°
Point Module. See Switches and Sensors section MOUNTING BRACKETS Z1- Electroless Nickel Plate
for information and ordering data. SERIES SIZE NO.
2000 -32 Options may affect unit length.
BUILT-IN METER OUT 4000 -34 See unit dimension and options
FLOW CONTROL VALVE 6000 -38
! pages for adders.
ORDERING DATA: AIR/OIL TANDEM ROTARY ACTUATORS
Port Control is standard on 8000 -39
SOLUTIONS FOR
all Air/Oil Tandem Actuators.
See Switches and Sensors
section for complete
AIR/OIL TANDEM ROTARY ACTUATORS:
SERIES 2000-8000
BENEFITS
■ PHD Air/Oil Tandem Actuators provide smooth consistent
rotary motion even at low speeds for applications requiring
positive control of payload.
■ Design provides simplicity and economics of air power with the

smooth control of hydraulics.
■ Oil transfer is accomplished through a one-piece tandem cap

eliminating external crossovers.
■ Four bore sizes are available in both 2 and 3 position models

with standard rotations up to 450° to fit a variety of
application requirements.
■ Built-in flow controls are standard for precise control of
3C
rotation speed.
OUTPUT TORQUES TO 1,590 in-lb [179 Nm]
■ Free floating pistons with rack and pinion design eliminate
■ Sealed shaft ball bearings provide long life and maximum shaft A
■ Available with a wide range of options including cushions,

angle adjustments, shock pads, and pinion shaft options for
specifying the exact actuator for your application.
B
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
This feature is available on Series 2000, 4000, 6000,
and 8000. One end functions as a control member only,
reducing the effective output torque to match 1000, 3000,
5000, and 7000 respectively.
The illustration shows a Tandem Actuator with built-in
THEORETICAL TORQUE in-lb/psi [Nm/bar] Port Controls®, crossover manifold and oil reservoir. The
SERIES latter serves as an accumulator to compensate for oil
2000 4000 6000 8000 volume changes due to temperature variation.
.38 1.1 2.3 10.6
[.63] [1.83] [3.62] [17.61] NOTE: The Reservoir should have 20 psi [1.3 bar]
pressure at all times to ensure the system remains purged.
SPECIFICATIONS R1xR & R2xR

RACK Alloy Steel
END CAPS Zinc Plated Steel
TUBES Hardcoated Aluminum on Air side, Honed Steel on Oil side
BEARINGS Two Steel Ball Bearings
PORTS NPT [BSP]
WORKING PRESSURE 150 psi [10 bar] Air Max.
OPTIONS Cushions, Angle Adjustments, Magnetic Pistons,
Fluoro-Elastomer Seals (Port Controls® are standard)
HYDRAULIC FLUID Rykon 32 (Viscosity at 100°F [38°C] is 158 SSU; at 250°F [126°C] is 45.1)
3C-15
INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION CAT-03 www.phdinc.com/28000r
3C
3C-16
RESERVOIR ASSEMBLY IS INCLUDED WITH UNIT.
IMPERIAL
DIMENSIONAL DATA IS IN AIR/OIL & RESERVOIR SECTION 10.
SERIES 2000, 4000, & 6000 UNITS USE PART NO. 13459-03-2.
SERIES 8000 UNITS USE PART NO. 13459-02-2.
NOTE: THE RESERVOIR SHOULD HAVE 20 PSI PRESSURE AT ALL TIMES

TO ENSURE THE SYSTEM REMAINS PURGED.
(800) 624-8511
ZA MAX A + (T° x B) PA O
Y + (T° x Z) U2
NB +.001 DIA U1 LB
H G -.000
F 1.000 .080 1
2X PORT CONTROLS
2X
X NPT 2X BLEED PLUGS
W KEYWAY
I II 2 4 CHECK VALVE
FITTING
JA
C2 LA
C V DIA Q
L
C/2 LA/2 2 4 SPECIFIED BY R2xR
KA SQ III IV WHEN ORDERING
E R
CAT-03
E M THREAD 3
OPTIONAL 4X EACH FRONT,
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT D S TA
BACK & BOTTOM
LETTER DIMENSION
SERIES A B C D E F G H JA KA L LA LB M NB O PA Q R S TA U1 U2 V W X Y Z ZA
2000 6.215 .0174 3.000 2.000 1.500 .250 .500 0.00 .750 1.375 1.437 2.875 1.750 1/4-20 x .312 DP 1.125 x .056 DP 2.000 .875 2.000 .500 .250 1.500 .125 .312 .4998/.5003 1/8 x 1/16 x .625 1/8 2.849 .0087 1.125
4000 7.986 .026 4.250 3.000 2.000 .344 .688 .250 1.156 1.875 2.094 4.187 2.750 5/16-18 x .500 DP 2.000 x .039 DP 3.000 1.875 3.000 .625 .500 2.000 .125 .562 .8748/.8753 3/16 x 3/32 x 1.500 1/4 3.953 .013 1.500
6000 9.190 .026 5.000 4.000 2.500 .375 .750 .203 1.156 2.250 2.281 4.687 2.750 3/8-16 x .625 DP 2.1654 x .052 DP 3.000 1.875 3.500 .750 .500 2.000 .125 .375 1.124/1.125 1/4 x 1/8 x 1.500 1/4 4.563 .013 1.875
8000 11.128 .052 8.000 5.000 3.000 .469 1.062 .437 1.875 3.500 3.625 6.125 3.000 3/4-10 x 1.250 DP 3.3465 x .120 DP 5.000 3.500 5.000 1.500 1.250 2.500 1.000 .750 1.749/1.750 3/8 x 3/16 x 3.000 3/8 6.080 .026 2.875

ACTUATOR -A -D -P STANDARD -T 2000 6.998 7.781 9.347 10.913 12.479 14.045
DIMENSIONS: AIR/OIL TANDEM ROTARY ACTUATORS
TYPE -A1 -A2 -D1 -D2 -P1 -P2 -M -E PORT -P -D PORT -P -D 4000 9.156 10.326 12.666 15.006 17.346 19.686
R1xR & R2xR III I II IV STANDARD I & III I & III 2 4 4 4 4 4 6000 10.360 11.530 13.870 16.210 18.550 20.890
8000 13.468 15.808 20.488 25.168 29.848 34.528
T°
SOLUTIONS FOR
PORT POSITION: INDICATED BY CIRCLED NUMBERS PORT PRESSURIZED - E I II PORT PRESSURIZED - C2
MTG. HOLES: CENTERED ON CENTERLINE OF ACTUATOR BODY FULL CCW POSITION FULL CW POSITION
RESERVOIR ASSEMBLY IS INCLUDED WITH UNIT.
SERIES 2000, 4000, & 6000 UNITS USE PART NO. 68397-03-2. METRIC
NOTE: THE RESERVOIR SHOULD HAVE 1.4 bar PRESSURE AT ALL TIMES
SOLUTIONS FOR
ZA MAX A + (T° x B) PA O
Y + (T° x Z) U2
U1 LB
H G NB +.025 DIA
-.000 25.4 2.1 1
F
2X PORT CONTROLS
2X
X BSP 2X BLEED PLUGS
W KEYWAY
I II 2 4 CHECK VALVE
FITTING
JA
C2 LA
C V DIA Q
L
C/2 LA/2 2 4 SPECIFIED BY R2xR
KA SQ III IV WHEN ORDERING
E R
E M THREAD 3
OPTIONAL 4X EACH FRONT,
CAT-03
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT D S TA
BACK & BOTTOM
LETTER DIMENSION
IMPERIAL SHAFTS* METRIC SHAFTS*
SERIES A B C D E F G H JA KA L LA LB M NB O PA Q R S TA V W V W U1 U2 X Y Z ZA
2000 158 0.44 76 51 38.1 6 13 0 19 35 36 73 44 M6 x 1.0 x 8 28.58 X 1.4 50.8 22 50.8 13 6 38.1 12.69/12.71 3.15 x 1.59 x 16 12.00/11.97 4 x 2.5 x 15 3 8 G1/8 72 0.22 29
4000 203 0.66 108 76 50.8 9 17 6 29 48 53 106 70 M8 x 1.0 x 13 50.80 X 1.0 76.2 48 76.2 16 13 50.8 22.22/22.23 4.75 x 2.36 x 38 22.00/21.96 6 x 3.5 x 32 3 14 G1/4 100 0.33 38
6000 233 0.66 127 102 63.5 10 19 5 29 57 58 119 70 M10 x 1.5 x 16 55.00 X 1.3 76.2 48 88.9 19 13 50.8 28.55/28.58 6.35 x 3.18 x 38 28.00/27.96 8 x 5 x 40 3 10 G1/4 116 0.33 48
8000 283 1.32 203 127 76.2 12 27 11 48 89 92 156 76 M20 x 2.5 x 32 85.00 X 3.0 127.0 89 127 38 32 63.5 44.42/44.45 9.53 x 2.36 x 78 44.00/43.96 12 x 5 x 56 25 19 G3/8 154 0.66 73
NUMBERS FOR METRIC UNITS AND ARE IN mm. QUICK REFERENCE FOR: A + (T° x B)
DEGREE OF ROTATION
SERIES 45 90 180 270 360 450
OPTION LOCATION REFERENCE 2000 177.7 197.6 237.4 277.2 317.0 356.7
LETTER OPTION PORT & NEEDLE LOCATIONS 4000 232.6 262.2 321.7 381.2 440.6 500.0
DIMENSIONS: AIR/OIL TANDEM ROTARY ACTUATORS
REFERENCED BY TUBE NUMBER REFERENCED BY CIRCLED NUMBERS 6000 263.1 292.9 352.3 411.7 471.2 530.9
ACTUATOR -A -D -P STANDARD -T 8000 342.1 401.5 520.4 639.3 758.1 877.0
TYPE -A1 -A2 -D1 -D2 -P1 -P2 -M -E PORT -P -D PORT -P -D
R1xR & R2xR III I II IV STANDARD I & III I & III 2 4 4 4 4 4 T°
(800) 624-8511
PORT PRESSURIZED - E I II PORT PRESSURIZED - C2
FULL CCW POSITION FULL CW POSITION
3C-17
3C
3C
3C-18
RESERVIOR ASSEMBLY IS INCLUDED WITH UNIT.
DIMENSIONAL DATA IS IN AIR/OIL & RESERVOIR SECTION 10.
IMPERIAL
NOTE: THE RESERVOIR SHOULD HAVE 20 PSI PRESSURE AT ALL TIMES

(800) 624-8511
PA O
ZA MAX YA + Z (T° + J°) Y + ( T° x Z )
U2
H G FA YB + (T° x Z) +.001
NB -.000 DIA U1 LB
F GA 1.000 .080 1
4X 2X PORT CONTROLS
X NPT 2X BLEED PLUGS W KEYWAY
V I II 2 4 CHECK VALVE
FITTING
JA
C D1 C2 LA V DIA Q
C/2 LA/2
L KA SQ
VI III IV 2 4 SPECIFIED BY
3R2xR WHEN
ORDERING
D2 E R
CAT-03
YA + Z (T° + K) 3
OPTIONAL E M THREAD S TA
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT D 4X EACH FRONT,
BACK & BOTTOM
LETTER DIMENSION
SERIES C D E F FA G GA H JA KA L LA LB M NB O PA Q R S TA U1 U2 V W X Y YA YB Z ZA
2000 3.000 2.000 1.500 .500 .500 .750 .750 0.00 .750 1.375 1.437 2.875 1.750 1/4-20 x .312 DP 1.125 x .056 DP 2.000 .875 2.000 .500 .250 1.500 .125 .312 .4998/.5003 1/8 x 1/16 x .625 1/8 3.366 5.983 2.599 .0087 1.125
4000 4.250 3.000 2.000 .344 .375 .688 .719 .250 1.156 1.875 2.094 4.187 2.750 5/16-18 x .500 DP 2.000 x .039 DP 3.000 1.875 3.000 .625 .500 2.000 .125 .562 .8748/.8753 3/16 x 3/32 x 1.500 1/4 4.033 6.721 3.360 .013 1.500
DIMENSIONS: 3 POSITION AIR/OIL TANDEM
6000 5.000 4.000 2.500 .375 .344 .750 .719 .203 1.156 2.250 2.281 4.687 2.750 3/8-16 x .625 DP 2.1654 x .052 DP 3.000 1.875 3.500 .750 .500 2.000 .125 .375 1.124/1.125 1/4 x 1/8 x 1.500 1/4 4.627 7.325 3.980 .013 1.875
8000 8.000 5.000 3.000 .469 .469 1.062 1.062 .437 1.875 3.500 3.625 6.125 3.000 3/4-10 x 1.250 DP 3.3465 x .120 DP 5.000 3.500 5.000 1.500 1.250 2.500 1.000 .750 1.749/1.750 3/8 x 3/16 x 3.000 3/8 5.048 9.865 5.236 .026 2.875

OPTION LOCATION REFERENCE
LETTER OPTION PORT & NEEDLE LOCATIONS
REFERENCED BY TUBE NUMBER REFERENCED BY CIRCLED NUMBERS
ACTUATOR -D -P -M -E STANDARD -T
PORTS PRESSURIZED
TYPE -A -D1 -D2 -P1 -P2 I & III I & III PORT -P -D PORT -P -D
D1 & D 2
3R1xR & 3R2xR STANDARD II IV STANDARD V & VI V & VI 2 4 4 4 4 4
II
T°
SOLUTIONS FOR
PORT POSITIONS: INDICATED BY CIRCLED NUMBERS J° K°
MTG. HOLES: CENTERED ON CENTERLINE OF ACTUATOR BODY PORT PRESSURIZED - E PORT PRESSURIZED - C2
PLUMBING SCHEMATIC: L0CATED IN ENGINEERING DATA SECTION FULL CCW POSITION I III FULL CW POSITION
RESERVIOR ASSEMBLY IS INCLUDED WITH UNIT.
METRIC
NOTE: THE RESERVOIR SHOULD HAVE 1.4 BAR PRESSURE AT ALL TIMES
PA O
SOLUTIONS FOR
ZA MAX YA + Z (T° + J°) Y + ( T° x Z )
U2
H G FA YB + (T° x Z) +.025
NB -.000 DIA U1 LB
F GA 25.4 2.1 1
4X 2X PORT CONTROLS
X BSP 2X BLEED PLUGS W KEYWAY
V I II 2 4 CHECK VALVE
FITTING
JA
C D1 C2 LA V DIA Q
C/2 LA/2
L KA SQ
VI III IV 2 4 SPECIFIED BY
3R2xR WHEN
ORDERING
D2 E R
YA + Z (T° + K) 3
OPTIONAL E M THREAD S TA
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT D 4X EACH FRONT,
BACK & BOTTOM
CAT-03
LETTER DIMENSION
SERIES C D E F FA G GA H JA KA L LA LB M NB O PA Q R S TA U1 U2 V W V W X Y YA YB Z ZA
2000 76 51 38.1 13 13 19 19 0 19 35 36 73.0 44.5 M6 x 1.0 x 8 28.58 x 1.4 DP 50.8 22 50.8 13 6 38.1 3 8 12.69/12.71 3.15 x 1.59 x 16 12.00/11.97 4 x 2.5 x 15 G1/8 85 152 66 0.22 29
4000 108 76 50.8 9 10 17 18 6 29 48 53 106.4 69.9 M8 x 1.0 x 13 50.80 x 1.0 DP 76.2 48 76.2 16 13 50.8 3 14 22.22/22.23 4.75 x 2.36 x 38 22.00/21.96 6 x 3.5 x 32 G1/4 102 171 85 0.33 38
6000 127 102 63.5 10 9 19 18 5 29 57 58 119.1 69.9 M10 x 1.5 x 16 55.00 x 1.3 DP 76.2 48 88.9 19 13 50.8 3 10 28.55/28.58 6.35 x 3.18 x 38 28.00/27.96 8 x 5 x 40 G1/4 118 186 101 0.33 48
8000 203 127 76.2 12 12 27 27 11 48 89 92 155.6 76.2 M20 x 2.5 x 32 85.00 x 3.0 DP 127.0 89 127.0 38 32 63.5 25 19 44.42/44.45 9.53 x 2.36 x 78 44.00/43.96 12 x 5 x 56 G3/8 128 251 133 0.66 73
DIMENSIONS: 3 POSITION AIR/OIL TANDEM

NUMBERS FOR METRIC UNITS AND ARE IN mm.

REFERENCED BY TUBE NUMBER REFERENCED BY CIRCLED NUMBERS PORTS PRESSURIZED
ACTUATOR -D -P -M -E STANDARD -T D1 & D2
TYPE -A -D1 -D2 -P1 -P2 I & III I & III PORT -P -D PORT -P -D II
3R1xR & 3R2xR STANDARD II IV STANDARD V & VI V & VI 2 4 4 4 4 4 T°
K°
(800) 624-8511
SHAFT KEYWAY: SHOWN AT MID-ROTATION J°
PORT PRESSURIZED - E PORT PRESSURIZED - C2
PORT POSITIONS: INDICATED BY CIRCLED NUMBERS FULL CCW POSITION I III FULL CW POSITION
PLUMBING SCHEMATIC: L0CATED IN ENGINEERING DATA SECTION
3C-19
3C
3C
UNITS WITH IMPERIAL SHAFTS AND KEYWAY
3C-20
TO ORDER SPECIFY:
No. of Rotary Positions, Type, Design No., Series,
IMPERIAL
Total Angle of Rotation, Various Angle Positions,
and Options.
SERIES
(800) 624-8511
NO. OF
www.phdinc.com/multir
4 (000) 1-3/8" Bore Double Rack
ROTARY POSITIONS DESIGN NO. 6 (000) 2" Bore Double Rack ANGLE OF ROTATION
3 - 3 Position 1 - Imperial - Port and mounting holes are imperial. 8 (000) 3" Bore Double Rack ANGLE OF ROTATION FROM POSITION I
4 - 4 Position 5 - Metric - Port and mounting holes are metric. NOTE: 2000 Series available in FROM POSITION I TO POSITION IV. USED
5 - 5 Position Pinion shafts and keyway are imperial. 3 Position only. TO POSITION II ON 5 POSITION ONLY.
5 - R1 1 A - 4 180 - 45 - 90 - 135 - P-D
CAT-03
TYPE TOTAL ANGLE ANGLE OF ROTATION OPTIONS
IMPERIAL METRIC OF ROTATION FROM POSITION I B - Shock Pads on extreme positions (not
R11A - Single Shaft Ext. R15A - Single Shaft Ext. STANDARD ANGLES TO POSITION III. USED available on hydraulic units)
150 psi Air Max. 10 bar Air Max. ON 4 & 5 POSITION ONLY. C - Cross Key Pinion Shaft
R21A - Double Shaft Ext. R25A - Double Shaft Ext. D - Cushions on extreme positions
150 psi Air Max. 10 bar Air Max. E - Magnetic Piston (All) or Hall Effect Switch
R11H - Single Shaft Ext. R15H - Single Shaft Ext. G - Shaft Seal both sides
1500 psi Hyd. Max. 100 bar Hyd. Max. H - Hollow Pinion Shaft (not available on type
R21H - Double Shaft Ext. R25H - Double Shaft Ext. PROXIMITY SWITCH R21x)
Options may affect unit length.
1500 psi Hyd. Max. 100 bar Hyd. Max. See unit dimension and options MOUNTING BRACKETS I - Port Position 1 on top rack
! pages for adders. Port Position 3 on bottom rack
SERIES SIZE NO.
J - Hall Sensor for rotations not exceeding 180°
NOTES: 2000 -32 (Set Point Module is ordered separately)
1) Angle Adjustments are standard on all Multi-Position 4000 -34 K - Preload Keyway Pinion Shaft
Rotary Actuators. 6000 -38 M - Magnetic Piston (All) for Reed Switch
2) Sensor must be used with a PHD Set Point Module.
8000 -39 P - Port Controls on all caps
See Switches and Sensors section for information
See Switches and Sensors T - Port in Position 4
and ordering data. section for complete V - Fluoro-Elastomer Seals
ORDERING DATA: MULTI-POSITION ROTARY ACTUATORS
SOLUTIONS FOR
METRIC
UNITS WITH METRIC SHAFTS AND KEYWAY
TO ORDER SPECIFY:
SOLUTIONS FOR
No. of Rotary Positions, Type, Design No., Series,
Total Angle of Rotation, Various Angle Positions,
and Options.
SERIES
NO. OF 4 (000) 1-3/8" Bore Double Rack
ROTARY POSITIONS 6 (000) 2" Bore Double Rack ANGLE OF ROTATION
3 - 3 Position DESIGN NO. 8 (000) 3" Bore Double Rack ANGLE OF ROTATION FROM POSITION I
4 - 4 Position 6 - Metric - Ports, mounting holes, NOTE: 2000 Series available in FROM POSITION I TO POSITION IV. USED
5 - 5 Position pinion shafts and keyway are metric. 3 Position only. TO POSITION II ON 5 POSITION ONLY.
5 - R1 6 A - 4 180 - 45 - 90 - 135 - P-D
CAT-03
TYPE TOTAL ANGLE ANGLE OF ROTATION OPTIONS
R16A - Single Shaft Ext. OF ROTATION FROM POSITION I B - Shock Pads on extreme positions (not
10 bar Air Max. STANDARD ANGLES TO POSITION III. USED available on hydraulic units)
R26A - Double Shaft Ext. ON 4 & 5 POSITION ONLY. D - Cushions on extreme positions
10 bar Air Max. E - Magnetic Piston (All) or Hall Effect Switch
R16H - Single Shaft Ext. G - Shaft Seal both sides
PROXIMITY SWITCH M - Magnetic Piston (All) for Reed Switch
100 bar Hyd. Max.
MOUNTING BRACKETS P - Port Controls on all caps
R26H - Double Shaft Ext.
100 bar Hyd. Max. SERIES SIZE NO. T - Port in Position 4
2000 -32 V - Fluoro-Elastomer Seals
4000 -34
NOTES:
1) Angle Adjustments are standard on all Multi-Position 6000 -38 Options may affect unit length.
8000 -39 See unit dimension and options
Rotary Actuators. ! pages for adders.
2) Sensor must be used with a PHD Set Point Module. See Switches and Sensors
See Switches and Sensors section for information section for complete
ORDERING DATA: MULTI-POSITION ROTARY ACTUATORS
(800) 624-8511
and ordering data.
3C-21
3C
MULTI-POSITION ROTARY ACTUATORS:
SERIES 2000-8000
BENEFITS
■ PHD Multi-Position Rotary Actuators are offered in
3, 4, or 5 output shaft positions ideal for feeding and
positioning applications.
■ Multiple positioning design eliminates expensive and

cumbersome fixturing and pinning.
■ PHD Multi-Position Actuators are pneumatically or

hydraulically powered providing output torques up to
15,900 in-lb [1797 Nm]. OUTPUT TORQUES TO 15,900 in-lb [1797 Nm]
■ Four bore sizes are available with extreme position rotation up OPERATING PRINCIPLE
to 450° to fit a variety of requirements.
PHD Rotary Actuators and Multi-Motion Actuators
can be provided to yield three, four, or five output shaft
■ Free floating pistons with rack and pinion design eliminate
3C
positions. The intermediate angle increments are fixed as

specified and only the extreme positions can be adjusted
in the field.
■ Sealed shaft ball bearings provide long life and maximum shaft
Units are available for air or hydraulic service. The
schematic example shows a five position rotary actuator.
Pressurizing Port E provides full counter clockwise
■ Available with a wide range of options including built-in flow
rotation (Position I). Pressurizing Ports D1 and D2 traps
controls, cushions, shock pads, and pinion shaft options
the rack between the rod ends of the two outer pistons X
specifying the exact actuator for your application.
and Y to rotate output shaft to Position II. Pressurizing
Ports C1 and C2 moves floating pistons in the inside upper
cylinders against stop tubes to trap the rack in Position III.
Similarly, Positions IV and V can be obtained by
pressurizing Ports B1, B2 and A respectively.
Output positions can be selected in any sequence
allowing the actuator to stop at, or pass, any of the
intermediate positions (II, III, or IV).
SERIES D1 C2 C1 B1
2000 4000 6000 8000 X
.38 1.1 2.3 10.6
[.63] [1.83] [3.62] [17.61] Y
D2 E A B2
TYPE
SPECIFICATIONS R1xA & R2xA R1xH & R2xH
TUBE SEALS Square Cut
RACKS Alloy Steel
END CAPS Zinc Plated Steel
TUBES Hardcoated Aluminum Hardcoated Aluminum on Series 2000 & 4000
— Honed Steel on Series 6000 & 8000
PORTS NPT [BSP]
LUBRICATION Permanent for Non-Lube Air —
WORKING PRESSURE 150 psi [10 bar] Air Max. 1500 psi [100 bar] Hyd. Max.
OPTIONS Port Controls®, Cushions, Magnetic Pistons,
Fluoro-Elastomer Seals (Angle Adjustment is standard)
3C-22
www.phdinc.com/multir CAT-03 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
IMPERIAL
Y + (T° x Z)
H G +.001
NB -.000 DIA PA O
F U 1
SOLUTIONS FOR
4X
X NPT
W KEYWAY
I II 2 4
JA
C
C2 C1
V DIA Q
C/2 L KA SQ 2 4
III IV
SPECIFIED BY 3R21x
E A R WHEN ORDERING
E 3
D M THREAD S TA
4X EACH FRONT,
BACK & BOTTOM
LETTER DIMENSION
CAT-03
SERIES A B C D E F G H JA KA L M NB O PA Q R S TA U V W X Y Z ZA
2000 5.698 .0174 3.000 2.000 1.500 .250 .500 0.00 .750 1.375 1.437 1/4-20 x .312 DP 1.125 x .056 DP 2.000 .875 2.000 .500 .250 1.500 .312 .4998/.5003 1/8 x 1/16 x .625 1/8 2.849 .0087 1.125
4000 7.906 .026 4.250 3.000 2.000 .344 .688 .250 1.156 1.875 2.094 5/16-18 x .500 DP 2.000 x .039 DP 3.000 1.875 3.000 .625 .500 2.000 .562 .8748/.8753 3/16 x 3/32 x 1.500 1/4 3.953 .013 1.500
6000 9.126 .026 5.000 4.000 2.500 .375 .750 .203 1.156 2.250 2.281 3/8-16 x .625 DP 2.1654 x .052 DP 3.000 1.875 3.500 .750 .500 2.000 .375 1.124/1.125 1/4 x 1/8 x 1.500 1/4 4.563 .013 1.875
8000 12.160 .052 8.000 5.000 3.000 .469 1.062 .437 1.875 3.500 3.625 3/4-10 x 1.250 DP 3.3465 x .120 DP 5.000 3.500 5.000 1.500 1.250 2.500 .750 1.749/1.750 3/8 x 3/16 x 3.000 3/8 6.080 .026 2.875

ACTUATOR STANDARD -T 2000 6.481 7.264 8.830 10.396 11.962 13.528
TYPE -A -B -D -P -M -E PORT -P -D PORT -P -D 4000 9.076 10.246 12.586 14.926 17.266 19.606

3R11A & 3R21A STANDARD I & II I & II ALL ALL ALL 2 1&3 1 4 1&3 1 6000 10.296 11.466 13.806 16.146 18.486 20.826
3R11H & 3R21H STANDARD N/A I & II ALL ALL ALL 2 1&3 1 4 1&3 1 8000 14.500 16.840 21.520 26.200 30.880 35.560
DIMENSIONS: 3 POSITION ROTARY ACTUATORS
PORTS PRESSURIZED
C1 & C2
II
CUSHIONS: SERIES 2000 ACTUATORS: T°
ADD 1/2" TO RESPECTIVE “A” AND “Y” DIMENSION FOR EACH CUSHION
MTG. HOLES: CENTERED ON CENTERLINE OF ACTUATOR BODY I° R°
STOP TUBES: LOCATED IN TUBES I & II PORT PRESSURIZED - E PORT PRESSURIZED - A
PLUMBING SCHEMATIC: L0CATED IN ENGINEERING DATA SECTION FULL CCW POSITION I III FULL CW POSITION
(800) 624-8511
3C-23
3C
3C
3C-24
Y + (T° x Z)
METRIC
H G +.025
NB -.000 DIA PA O
F U 1
4X
X BSP
W KEYWAY
I II 2 4
(800) 624-8511
JA
C
C2 C1
V DIA Q
C/2 L KA SQ 2 4
III IV
SPECIFIED BY 3R2xx
E A R WHEN ORDERING
E 3
D M THREAD S TA
4X EACH FRONT,
BACK & BOTTOM
LETTER DIMENSION
SERIES A B C D E F G H JA KA L M NB O PA Q R S TA U V W V W X Y Z ZA
2000 145 0.44 76 51 38.1 6 13 0 19 35 36 M6 x 1.0 x 8 28.58 x 1.4 DP 50.8 22 50.8 13 6 38.1 8 12.69/12.71 3.15 x 1.59 x 16 12.00/11.97 4 x 2.5 x 15 G1/8 72 0.22 29
CAT-03
4000 201 0.66 108 76 50.8 9 17 6 29 48 53 M8 x 1.0 x 13 50.80 x 1.0 DP 76.2 48 76.2 16 13 50.8 14 22.22/22.23 4.75 x 2.36 x 38 22.00/21.96 6 x 3.5 x 32 G1/4 100 0.33 38
6000 292 0.66 127 102 63.5 10 19 5 29 57 58 M10 x 1.5 x 16 55.00 x 1.3 DP 76.2 48 88.9 19 13 50.8 10 28.55/28.58 6.35 x 3.18 x 38 28.00/27.96 8 x 5 x 40 G1/4 116 0.33 48
8000 302 1.32 203 127 76.2 12 27 11 48 89 92 M20 x 2.5 x 32 85.00 x 3.0 DP 127.0 89 127.0 38 32 63.5 19 44.42/44.45 9.53 x 2.36 x 78 44.00/43.96 12 x 5 x 56 G3/8 154 0.66 73
NUMBERS FOR METRIC UNITS AND ARE IN mm. QUICK REFERENCE FOR: A + (T° x B)
DEGREE OF ROTATION
SERIES 45 90 180 270 360 450
2000 164.6 184.5 224.2 264.1 303.8 343.6
4000 230.5 260.2 319.8 379.1 438.6 498.0
OPTION LOCATION REFERENCE 6000 261.5 291.1 410.8 350.7 469.5 529.0
LETTER OPTION PORT & NEEDLE LOCATIONS 8000 368.3 427.7 539.6 546.6 784.4 903.2
PORTS PRESSURIZED
ACTUATOR STANDARD -T
C1 & C2
TYPE -A -B -D -P -M -E PORT -P -D PORT -P -D

3R1xA & 3R2xA STANDARD I & II I & II ALL ALL ALL 2 1&3 1 4 1&3 1 II
3R1xH & 3R2xH STANDARD N/A I & II ALL ALL ALL 2 1&3 1 4 1&3 1 T°
I° R°
SHAFT KEYWAY: SHOWN AT MID-ROTATION PORT PRESSURIZED - E PORT PRESSURIZED - A
PORT POSITIONS: INDICATED BY CIRCLED NUMBERS FULL CCW POSITION I III FULL CW POSITION
CUSHIONS: SERIES 2000 ACTUATORS:
ADD 13.0 mm TO RESPECTIVE “A” AND “Y” DIMENSION FOR EACH CUSHION
SOLUTIONS FOR
STOP TUBES: LOCATED IN TUBES I & II
IMPERIAL
YA + Z (T° + J°) Y + (T° x Z) ZA MAX
SOLUTIONS FOR
FA YB + (T° x Z) +.001 G
H G NB -.000 DIA H PA O
GA F U 1
F
6X X NPT
W KEYWAY
V I II 2 4
JA
C D1 C2 C1
V DIA Q
C/2
L 2 4
KA SQ VI III IV
SPECIFIED BY 4R21x
D2 E A R WHEN ORDERING
YA + Z (T° + K°) 3
E M THREAD S TA
D 4X EACH FRONT,
BACK & BOTTOM
CAT-03
LETTER DIMENSION
SERIES C D E F FA G GA H JA KA L M NB O PA Q R S TA U V W X Y YA YB Z ZA
4000 4.250 3.000 2.000 .344 .375 .688 .719 .250 1.156 1.875 2.094 5/16-18 x .500 DP 2.000 x .039 3.000 1.875 3.000 .625 .500 2.000 .562 .8748/.8753 3/16 x 3/32 x 1.500 1/4 3.953 6.721 3.360 .013 1.500
6000 5.000 4.000 2.500 .375 .344 .750 .719 .203 1.156 2.250 2.281 3/8-16 x .625 DP 2.1654 x .052 3.000 1.875 3.500 .750 .500 2.000 .375 1.124/1.125 1/4 x 1/8 x 1.500 1/4 4.563 7.325 3.980 .013 1.875
8000 8.000 5.000 3.000 .469 .469 1.062 1.062 .437 1.875 3.500 3.625 3/4-10 x 1.250 DP 3.3465 x .120 5.000 3.500 5.000 1.500 1.250 2.500 .750 1.749/1.750 3/8 x 3/16 x 3.000 3/8 6.080 9.865 5.236 .026 2.875


TYPE -A -B -D -P -M -E PORT -P -D PORT -P -D
4R11A & 4R21A STANDARD II & IV II & IV ALL ALL ALL 2 1&3 1&3 4 1&3 1&3
4R11H & 4R21H STANDARD N/A II & IV ALL ALL ALL 2 1&3 1&3 4 1&3 1&3
PORTS PRESSURIZED T° PORTS PRESSURIZED

D1 & D2
II III C1 & C 2
SHAFT KEYWAY: SHOWN AT MID-ROTATION K°
MTG. HOLES: CENTERED ON CENTERLINE OF ACTUATOR BODY I°
J° R°
STOP TUBES: LOCATED IN TUBES I & II PORTS PRESSURIZED – E PORTS PRESSURIZED – A
PLUMBING SCHEMATIC: L0CATED IN ENGINEERING DATA SECTION FULL CCW POSITION I IV FULL CW POSITION
(800) 624-8511
3C-25
3C
3C
3C-26
METRIC
YA + Z (T° + J°) Y + (T° x Z) ZA MAX
FA YB + (T° x Z) +.025 G
H G NB -.000 DIA H PA O
GA F U 1
F
6X X BSP
(800) 624-8511
W KEYWAY
V I II 2 4
JA
C D1 C2 C1
V DIA Q
C/2
L 2 4
KA SQ VI III IV
SPECIFIED BY 4R2xx
D2 E A R WHEN ORDERING
YA + Z (T° + K°) 3
E M THREAD S TA
D 4X EACH FRONT,
BACK & BOTTOM
LETTER DIMENSION
CAT-03
SERIES C D E F FA G GA H JA KA L M NB O PA Q R S TA U V W V W X Y YA YB Z ZA
4000 108 76 50.8 9 10 17 18 6 29 48 53 M8 x 1.25 x 13 50.80 x 1.0 DP 76.2 48 76.2 16 13 50.8 14 22.22/22.23 4.75 x 2.36 x 38 22.00/21.96 6 x 3.5 x 32 G1/4 102 171 85 0.33 38
6000 127 102 63.5 10 9 19 18 5 29 57 58 M10 x 1.5 x 16 55.00 x 1.3 DP 76.2 48 88.9 19 13 50.8 10 28.55/28.58 6.35 x 3.18 x 38 28.00/27.96 8 x 5 x 40 G1/4 118 186 101 0.33 48
8000 203 127 76.2 12 12 27 27 11 48 89 92 M20 x 2.5 x 32 85.00 x 3.0 DP 127.0 89 127.0 38 32 63.5 19 44.42/44.45 9.53 x 2.36 x 78 44.00/43.96 12 x 5 x 56 G3/8 126 251 133 0.66 73

-E PORT -P -D PORT -P -D
TYPE -A -B -D -P -M
4R1xA & 4R2xA STANDARD II & IV II & IV ALL ALL ALL 2 1&3 1&3 4 1&3 1&3 PORTS PRESSURIZED T° PORTS PRESSURIZED
4R15xH & 4R2xH STANDARD N/A II & IV ALL ALL ALL 2 1&3 1&3 4 1&3 1&3 D1 & D2
II III C1 & C2
K°
I°
SHAFT KEYWAY: SHOWN AT MID-ROTATION J° R°
PORT POSITIONS: INDICATED BY CIRCLED NUMBERS PORTS PRESSURIZED – E PORTS PRESSURIZED – A
FULL CCW POSITION I IV FULL CW POSITION
SOLUTIONS FOR
IMPERIAL
ZA MAX YA + Z (T° + J°) YA + Z (T° + N°) ZA MAX
FA YB + (T° x Z) YB + (T° x Z) FA G H
PA O
SOLUTIONS FOR
H G +.001
NB -.000 DIA U 1
F GA GA F
8X
X NPT
W KEYWAY
V I II VII 2 4
JA
D1 C2 C1 B1
C
V DIA Q
C/2 L
KA SQ VI III IV VIII 2 4
B2 SPECIFIED BY
D2 E A R 5R21x WHEN
ORDERING
YA + Z (T° + K°) YA + Z (T° x P°) 3
E M THREAD S TA
D 4X EACH FRONT,
BACK & BOTTOM
CAT-03
LETTER DIMENSION
SERIES C D E F FA G GA H JA KA L M NB O PA Q R S TA U V W X YA YB Z ZA
4000 4.250 3.000 2.000 .344 .375 .688 .719 .250 1.156 1.875 2.094 5/16-18 x .500 DP 2.000 x .039 DP 3.000 1.875 3.000 .625 .500 2.000 .562 .8748/.8753 3/16 x 3/32 x 1.500 1/4 6.721 3.360 .013 1.500
6000 5.000 4.000 2.500 .375 .344 .750 .719 .203 1.156 2.250 2.281 3/8-16 x .625 DP 2.1654 x .052 DP 3.000 1.875 3.500 .750 .500 2.000 .375 1.124/1.125 1/4 x 1/8 x 1.500 1/4 7.325 3.980 .013 1.875
8000 8.000 5.000 3.000 .469 .469 1.062 1.062 .437 1.875 3.500 3.625 3/4-10 x 1.250 DP 3.3465 x .120 DP 5.000 3.500 5.000 1.500 1.250 2.500 .750 1.749/1.750 3/8 x 3/16 x 3.000 3/8 9.865 5.236 .026 2.875

ACTUATOR STANDARD -T PORTS PRESSURIZED
TYPE -A -B -D -P -M -E PORT -P -D PORT -P -D C1 & C 2

5R11A & 5R21A STANDARD VII & V VII & V ALL ALL ALL 2 1&3 1 4 1&3 1 III
5R11H & 5R21H STANDARD N/A VII & V ALL ALL ALL 2 1&3 1 4 1&3 1 T°
PORTS PRESSURIZED PORTS PRESSURIZED

D1 & D 2
II P°
IV B1 & B 2
PORT POSITIONS: INDICATED BY CIRCLED NUMBERS I° R°
N°
MTG. HOLES: CENTERED ON CENTERLINE OF ACTUATOR BODY K°
STOP TUBES: LOCATED IN TUBES I & II PORT PRESSURIZED - E J° PRESSURIZED - A
FULL CCW POSITION
I V PORT
FULL CW POSITION
(800) 624-8511
3C-27
3C
3C
3C-28
METRIC
ZA MAX YA + Z (T° + J°) YA + Z (T° + N°) ZA MAX
FA YB + (T° x Z) YB + (T° x Z) FA G H
H G +.025 PA O
GA
NB -.000 DIA
GA U 1
F F
8X
X BSP
W KEYWAY
(800) 624-8511
V I II VII 2 4
JA
D1 C2 C1 B1
C
V DIA Q
C/2 L
KA SQ VI III IV VIII 2 4
B2 SPECIFIED BY
D2 E A R 5R2xx WHEN
ORDERING
YA + Z (T° + K°) YA + Z (T° x P°) 3
E M THREAD S TA
D 4X EACH FRONT,
BACK & BOTTOM
LETTER DIMENSION
SERIES C D E F FA G GA H JA KA L M NB O PA Q R S TA U V W V W X YA YB Z ZA
4000 108 76 50.8 9 10 17 18 6 29 48 53 M8 x 1.25 x 13 50.80 x 1.0 DP 76.2 48 76.2 16 13 50.8 14 22.22/22.23 4.75 x 2.36 x 38 22.00/21.96 6 x 3.5 x 32 G1/4 171 85 0.33 38
CAT-03
6000 127 102 63.5 10 9 19 18 5 29 57 58 M10 x 1.5 x 16 55.00 x 1.3 DP 76.2 48 88.9 19 13 50.8 10 28.55/28.58 6.35 x 3.18 x 38 28.00/27.96 8 x 5 x 40 G1/4 186 101 0.33 48
8000 203 127 76.2 12 12 27 27 11 48 89 92 M20 x 2.5 x 32 85.00 x 3.0 DP 127.0 89 127.0 38 32 63.5 19 44.42/44.45 9.53 x 2.36 x 78 44.00/43.96 12 x 5 x 56 G3/8 251 133 0.66 73

PORTS PRESSURIZED
LETTER OPTION PORT & NEEDLE LOCATIONS C1 & C2
ACTUATOR STANDARD -T III
-A -B -D -P -M -E PORT -P -D PORT -P -D T°
TYPE
5R1xA & 5R2xA STANDARD VII & V VII & V ALL ALL ALL 2 1&3 1 4 1&3 1 PORTS PRESSURIZED PORTS PRESSURIZED
D1 & D2
II P°
IV B1 & B2
5R1xH & 5R2xH STANDARD N/A VII & V ALL ALL ALL 2 1&3 1 4 1&3 1
I° R°
N°
K°
PORT PRESSURIZED - E I J° V PORT PRESSURIZED - A
FULL CCW POSITION FULL CW POSITION
SOLUTIONS FOR
ENGINEERING DATA: SERIES 1000-8000 ROTARY ACTUATORS
RATINGS CONTROLS
All pneumatic rotary actuators have a maximum pressure rating of Rotary Actuator units are operated by directional valves in the same
150 psi [10 bar] air. Most hydraulic rotary actuators have a maximum manner as air and hydraulic cylinders.
pressure rating of 1500 psi [100 bar]. Except as noted in chart below.* Control of piston speeds is extremely important as inertia force is a
function of rotational speed and distance from load to output shaft center.
HYD OPTION psi [bar]
SERIES *PLAIN -P -D -E OR -M
1000 — — — — — — — —
ANGLE OF ROTATION
2000 1000 [69] 750 [52] 750 [52] — — Series 1000-8000 Rotary Actuators are furnished in 6 stock angles:
3000 — — — — — — — — 45°, 90°, 180°, 270°, 360°, and 450°. Other angles are available as
specified.
4000 — — 750 [52] 750 [52] — —
Series 018x Miniature Rotary Actuators are all furnished with 180°
5000 — — — — — — 1100 [76] rotation, but can be adjusted anywhere from 180° to 0°.
6000 — — 750 [52] 750 [52] 1100 [76]
7000 — — — — — — 500 [35] TOTAL ROTATIONAL
8000 — — 750 [52] 750 [52] 500 [35]
TOLERANCES & BACKLASH
Minimum factor of safety at maximum rated hydraulic pressure for
output shaft is 2:1, and for hydraulic chambers is 3:1. Consult PHD for SERIES ROTATIONAL TOLERANCE BACKLASH
proof pressure data. 1000 & 2000 -0°, +10° *±30 minutes
3C
3000 & 4000 -0°, +10° *±15 minutes
5000 & 6000 -0°, +10° *±15 minutes
BREAKAWAY 7000 & 8000 -0°, +10° *±7.5 minutes
All RxxA units will breakway at 20 psi [1.4 bar]. RxxH units will 018x75x -0°, +10° ±1.25 degrees during
breakway at 40 psi [2.8 bar]. All tandem RxxR units will breakaway at 40
rotation, ±0° at end
psi [2.8 bar]. 018x air units will breakaway at 20 psi [1.4 bar], 018x
018x50x -0°, +10° ±2 degrees during
tandem units will breakaway at 30 psi [2.1 bar].
rotation, ±0° at end
TEMPERATURE LIMITS AND FLUIDS *Double rack actuators are available with 0° backlash at ends of
Rotary Actuator units are equipped with Buna-N piston seals rotation, if -A option is used.
suitable for use in temperatures ranging from -20° to +180°F Total rotational tolerance may be on both or either sides of mid-
[-28° to 82°C] and may be used with air, water, petroleum-based rotation minimum.
hydraulic fluid, or fuel oil.
Seals for other fluids or temperature requirements are available, but
must be specified. All Rotary Actuators have teflon back-up rings for
universal use (except Miniature Rotary Actuators Series 018x).
MULTI-POSITION MID-POSITION
NOTE: For applications where water-based fluids are used, the units TOLERANCES & BACKLASH
must be modified. Consult PHD for specifications.
SERIES TOLERANCE** BACKLASH
LUBRICATION 2000 ±1° ± 1-1/2°
Gear racks and pinion are lubricated at the factory and may never 4000 & 6000 ±1/2° ± 1-1/4°
need lubrication. However, if lubrication should be needed due to adverse 8000 ±1/4° ± 1°
conditions, use high grade bearing grease. 018x752 (3 pos.) Adjustable Adjustable to 0°
NOTE: Port for grease nipple provided in top of actuator body. **Rotational position from one intermediate position to another
Lubricate only while ports are pressurized except on 018x75 and 018x50, (measured at centers of backlash).
which have no lube ports.
Approximately 1/2 in3 [8 cm3] of grease is sufficient for any series NOTE: 3 position and 5 position have 0° backlash at ends of rotation.
actuator, each 250,000 cycles of 360° duration. 4 position will have up to stated figure at ends of rotation.
3C-29
THEORETICAL TORQUE OUTPUT in-lb [Nm]
INPUT PRESSURE psi [bar]
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 120 150 250 500 1000 1500
MODEL [2.7] [3.4] [4.1] [4.8] [5.5] [6.2] [6.9] [8.3] [10.3] [17.2] [34.4] [68.9] [103.4]
15 19 23 27 31 35 39 47 58 98 196 392 588
1000
[1.7] [2.1] [2.6] [3.0] [3.5] [4.0] [4.4] [5.3] [6.6] [11.1] [22.2] [44.3] [66.5]
31 39 47 54 62 70 78 94 117 196 392 784 —
2000
[3.5] [4.4] [5.3] [6.1] [7.1] [8.0] [8.8] [16.6] [13.2] [22.2] [44.3] [88.6] [—]
44 55 66 77 88 100 111 133 166 277 555 1110 1665
3000
[4.9] [6.2] [7.4] [8.7] [10.0] [11.3] [12.6] [15.0] [18.8] [31.3] [62.7] [125.5] [188.2]
88 111 133 155 177 200 222 266 333 555 1110 2200 3330
4000
[10.0] [12.6] [15.0] [17.5] [20.0] [22.6] [25.1] [30.1] [37.7] [62.7] [125.5] [248.8] [376.5]
94 118 141 165 189 212 236 283 354 590 1180 2360 3540
5000
[10.6] [13.3] [15.9] [18.7] [21.4] [23.9] [26.7] [32.0] [4.0] [66.7] [133.4] [266.9] [400.3]
189 236 282 330 378 424 472 564 708 1180 2360 4720 7080
6000
[21.4] [26.7] [31.9] [37.3] [42.7] [47.9] [53.4] [63.8] [80.1] [133.4] [266.9] [533.7] [800.6]
424 530 635 740 848 950 1060 1270 1590 2650 5300 10600 15900
7000
[47.9] [59.9] [71.8] [83.7] [95.9] [107.4] [179.9] [143.4] [179.8] [299.7] [599.5] [1198.6][1297.4]
3C
848 1060 1270 1480 1696 1900 2120 2540 3180 5300 10600 21200 31800
8000
[95.5] [119.9] [143.6] [167.4] [191.8] [214.8] [239.7] [287.2] [359.6] [599.3] [1198.6][2397.3][3595.9]
4.4 5.5 6.6 7.7 8.8 9.9 11.0 13.2 16.5 — — — —
018x751
[.49] [.62] [.74] [.87] [.99] [1.12] [1.24] [1.49] [1.87] — — — —
0180752
8.8 11.0 13.2 15.4 17.6 19.8 22.0 26.4 33.0 — — — —
0185752
[.99] [1.24] [1.49] [1.74] [1.99] [2.24] [2.48] [2.98] [3.73] — — — —
0186752
4.4 5.5 6.6 7.7 8.8 9.9 11.0 13.2 16.5 — — — —
018x75T
[.49] [.62] [.74] [.87] [.99] [1.12] [1.24] [1.49] [1.87] — — — —
0183752
4.4 5.5 6.6 7.7 8.8 9.9 11.0 13.2 16.5 — — — —
0188752
[.49] [.62] [.74] [.87] [.99] [1.12] [1.24] [1.49] [1.87] — — — —
0189752
2.6 3.3 3.9 4.6 5.2 5.9 6.5 7.8 9.8 — — — —
018x502
[.29] [.37] [.44] [.52] [.59] [.66] [.74] [.88] [1.11] — — — —
Use the single rack torques for all Air/Oil Tandem and Multi-Position Rotary Actuators.
Torques shown are theoretical. Allow 10% for friction loss. Allow 20% for friction loss
on all Air/Oil Tandem Rotary Actuators.
3C-30
www.phdinc.com/products/rotaryactuators INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
CAT-03
PHYSICAL DATA
GEAR DISPLACEMENT AXIAL BEARING RADIAL BEARING DISTANCE BETWEEN PISTON
SERIES RACKS in3 [cm3]/DEG. ROT. LOAD CAPACITY lb [N]* LOAD CAPACITY lb [N]* SHAFT BEARINGS in [mm] DIAMETER in [mm]
1000 1 .007 [.115] 50 [222] 100 [444] 1.375 [34.9] 1 [25.4]
2000 2 .014 [.229]
3000 1 .019 [.312] 125 [556] 250 [1112] 2.188 [55.6] 1-3/8 [35]
4000 2 .038 [.623]
5000 1 .041 [.672] 200 [890] 400 [1779] 2.235 [56.8] 2 [50]
6000 2 .082 [13.44]
7000 1 .185 [3.032] 500 [2224] 1000 [4448] 3.750 [95.3] 3 [76]
8000 2 .370 [6.064]
018x751 1 .002 [0.032] 15 [67] 25 [111] 1.060 [26.9] 3/4 [19]
018x752 2 .004 [0.064]
018x75T 2 .002 [0.032] 15 [67] 25 [111] 1.060 [26.9] 3/4 [19]
018x502 2 .0012 [0.020] 5 [22] 15 [22] .916 [23.3] 1/2 [13]
* Always support rotating member on external bearings whenever possible.
3C
WEIGHT TABLES lb [kg] SINGLE SHAFT EXTENSION ACTUATORS
SERIES 45° 90° 180° 270° 360° 450° PER 90° ADD FOR SHAFT EXT.
1000 2.1 [.95] 2.3 [1.04] 2.6 [1.18] 2.9 [1.31] 3.3 [1.49] 3.6 [1.64] .3 [.14] .1 [.04]
2000 3.1 [1.40] 3.3 [1.50] 3.9 [1.78] 4.5 [2.09] 5.1 [2.32] 5.7 [2.58] .6 [.28] .1 [.04]
3000 7.2 [3.26] 7.5 [3.40] 8.3 [3.76] 9.0 [4.08] 9.8 [4.45] 10.5 [4.76] .8 [.36] .4 [.18]
4000 9.6 [4.35] 10.2 [4.62] 11.4 [5.17] 12.6 [5.71] 13.8 [6.26] 15.0 [6.80] 1.2 [.54] .4 [.18]
5000 11.5 [5.22] 11.9 [5.42] 12.8 [5.80] 13.5 [6.13] 14.3 [6.49] 15.1 [6.86] .8 [.37] .5 [.27]
6000 15.8 [7.7] 16.8 [7.63] 18.3 [8.3] 19.8 [8.99] 21.3 [9.67] 22.8 [10.35] 1.5 [.68] .5 [.27]
7000 Air 37.9 [17.19] 39.1 [12.25] 41.7 [18.91] 44.2 [20.05] 46.8 [21.20] 49.4 [22.43] 2.6 [1.19] 2.4 [1.08]
7000 Hyd. 39.1 [17.75] 41.0 [18.60] 44.8 [20.32] 48.5 [22.00] 52.3 [23.71] 56.0 [25.41] 3.8 [1.72] 2.4 [1.08]
8000 Air 49.6 [22.52] 52.1 [23.65] 57.4 [26.03] 62.6 [28.41] 67.9 [30.80] 73.1 [33.18] 5.3 [2.40] 2.4 [1.08]
8000 Hyd. 52.1 [23.65] 55.9 [25.35] 63.4 [28.75] 70.9 [32.16] 78.4 [35.56] 85.9 [38.96] 7.5 [3.40] 2.4 [1.08]
MINIATURE ROTARY ACTUATORS WEIGHTS lb [kg]

SERIES
018x751 018x752 018x75T 0183752, 0188752, & 0189752 018x502
2.1 [.95] 2.6 [1.18] 2.6 [1.18] 3.1 [1.41] .8 [.36]
AIR/OIL TANDEM MAXIMUM SPEEDS (NO LOAD CONDITION)

OPERATING OIL MAX. SPEED OPERATING OIL MAX. SPEED
SERIES PRESSURE psi [bar] TEMPERATURE* (DEGREES/SEC) SERIES PRESSURE psi [bar] TEMPERATURE* (DEGREES/SEC)
50 [3.4] 270 50 [3.4] 156
60 [4.1] 95°F 294 60 [4.1] 105°F 180
2000 6000
70 [4.8] [35°C] 336 70 [4.8] [40.5°C] 210
80 [5.5] 366 80 [5.5] 216
50 [3.4] 258 50 [3.4] 132
60 [4.1] 95°F 288 60 [4.1] 135°F 144
4000 8000
70 [4.8] [35°C] 324 70 [4.8] [57.2°C] 150
80 [5.5] 348 80 [5.5] 156
OPERATING OIL SECONDS/ *Ambient Temperature 87°F [30°C] Standard Oil No. 15
MODEL PRESSURE psi [bar] TEMPERATURE* 180° ROTATION Reservoir Pressure = 20 psi [1.3 bar]
Speed decreases with increase in reservoir pressure.
50 [3.4] .31
60 [4.1] 95°F .27
018x75T
70 [4.8] [35°C] .25
80 [5.5] .22
3C-31
INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION www.phdinc.com/products/rotaryactuators
CAT-03
PLUMBING SCHEMATICS: ROTARY ACTUATORS
3 POSITION UNITS
SERIES 2000-8000
C2 C1
E A
S2 S1 S3
3C
PORTS PRESSURIZED
C1 & C2
II
T°
I° R°
PORT PRESSURIZED - E PORT PRESSURIZED - A
FULL CCW POSITION I III FULL CW POSITION
3 POSITION TANDEM UNITS

SERIES 2000-8000
D1 C2
D2 E
S2 S1 S3
PORTS PRESSURIZED
D1 & D2
II
T°
J° K°
PORT PRESSURIZED - E PORT PRESSURIZED - C2
FULL CCW POSITION I III FULL CW POSITION
3C-32
CAT-03
PLUMBING SCHEMATICS: ROTARY ACTUATORS
4 POSITION UNITS
SERIES 2000-8000
D1 C2 C1
D2 E A
S3 S2 S1 S4
3C
T°
PORTS PRESSURIZED II III PORTS PRESSURIZED
D1 & D2 C1 & C2
K°
J° I°
PORT PRESSURIZED - E R° PORT PRESSURIZED - A
FULL CCW POSITION I IV FULL CW POSITION
5 POSITION UNITS
SERIES 2000-8000
D1 C2 C1 B1
D2 E A B2
S2 S1 S5
S3 S4
PORTS PRESSURIZED
C1 & C2
III
T°
PORTS PRESSURIZED PORTS PRESSURIZED
D1 & D2 II IV B1 & B2
P°
I° R°
N°
K°
PORT PRESSURIZED - E J° PORT PRESSURIZED - A
FULL CCW POSITION I V FULL CW POSITION
3C-33
CAT-03
START-UP PROCEDURE: SERIES 1000-8000 ACTUATORS
ROTARY ACTUATORS AIR/OIL TANDEM ROTARY ACTUATORS
CAUTION: Angular velocity and deceleration of actuators are 1. Mount Reservoir “A” vertically above actuator hydraulic
normally controlled with Port Control® valves and cushions. section. (Approximately 12 feet [3.6 m] of flexible tubing has
been provided to allow reservoir to be mounted in convenient
At start-up, the actuator cylinders are often empty or not location.) Excess may be coiled up or cut off. Shortening of
pressurized. To prevent damage due to lack of governing media tube should take place by disconnecting tube from tank taking
and to assure a controlled start-up, the following procedure should care that minimum amount is allowed to drain from reservoir
be used. and that tube is kept full of oil at all times. A small air bubble
may form at end of tube when reassembled. This is not
1. After installation of actuator and auxiliary tooling (arms, jaws, detrimental and will disappear during operation of actuator.
fixtures, etc.), manually turn output shaft fully clockwise prior
to start up. Actuator should be started-up with typical work 2. Provide constant air supply regulated to 20 psi [1.3 bar] to
piece or load. port B on reservoir.
2. Apply pressure to rotary chamber in same direction as shaft is 3. Apply air pressure to reservoir. Next, LOOSEN (do not remove)
turned (clockwise port). drain plug C. Allow oil to drain until level reaches line E.
Retighten plug securely.
3. Apply pressure to opposite port and slowly open speed control
3C
valve governing counterclockwise direction. This will allow the 4. If actuator is equipped with cushions, open needle valves
actuator to rotate under control. Follow the same procedure in marked D approximately 1/8 turn.
opposite direction. Several cycles may be needed to obtain
proper speed adjustment. 5. Follow same procedure with port control needles marked P.
4. On units with adjustable cushions, set needle adjustment for 6. Air pressure may now be applied to actuator. Take care to keep
optimum effectiveness to minimize shock at end of rotation. clear from any tooling attached to the actuator shaft as it may
start rotating.
7. Adjust control needles to achieve proper velocities (and

decelerations).
B
E 8. Bleed plug G must not be loosened or removed as actuator will
lose oil charge.
A
REGULATOR 20 psi [1.3 bar]

F
CAUTION:
PLEASE DO NOT TAMPER WITH FITTING ASSEMBLY.
CONTAINS CHECK VALVE WITH LOOSE COMPONENTS.
D
MAINTENANCE VIDEOS
Field Maintenance Videos on filling and bleeding Air/Oil
Tandem Actuators are now available. Contact your local PHD
distributor or call our toll free number: 1-800-624-8511.
3C-34
CAT-03
OPTIONS: SERIES 1000-8000 ROTARY ACTUATORS
P PORT CONTROL® The self-locking needle has micrometer threads and is
adjustable under pressure. It determines the orifice size which
controls the exhaust volume only of the actuator proper. The
The “built-in” speed control valve. separate ball check is closed while fluid is exhausting from the
The exclusive PHD Port Control®, based on the “meter-out” actuator, but opens to permit full flow of incoming fluids. The PHD
principle, features an adjustable needle and a separate ball check. Port Control® provides the optimum in speed control for rotary
Both are built into the rotary actuator end cap and are used to actuators. It saves space and eliminates the cost of fittings and
control the speed of the actuator over its entire rotation. installation for external flow control valves.
D ADJUSTABLE CUSHIONS
PHD Cushions are designed for smooth deceleration at the end

of rotation. When the cushion is activated, the remaining volume in
the cylinder must exhaust past an adjustable needle which controls
the amount of deceleration. Effective cushion length is
3C
approximately 30° of rotation, except on the 8000 Tandem which
has 20° of cushion length.
Cushions on Series 2000, 4000, 6000 and 8000 are furnished
on one of two racks only.
H ZA MAX
ZB ZC
A ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
ZD DIA
Adjusting screw(s) for reducing angle of rotation in either or
both directions for use where exact degree of desired rotation
cannot be predetermined or where requirements may vary during
LETTER DIMENSION
operation. Standard adjusting screw will reduce angle of rotation up SERIES H ZA ZB ZC ZD
to 30°. Available in conjunction with all other optional features. 0.00 1.125 .312 3/16 HEX .875
1000 & 2000
Cushions are normally engaged over the last 30° of angle. The [0] [29] [8] — [22]
use of angle adjusting screws to reduce angle of rotation has a 3000 & 4000
.250 1.500 .375 1/4 HEX 1.250
direct effect on the length of cushion engagement. Example: 10° [6] [38] [10] — [32]
.203 1.875 .750 1/4 HEX 1.250
angle reduction will reduce cushion engagement by 10°. Angle 5000 & 6000
[5] [48] [19] — [32]
adjustments are standard on all Multi-Position Rotary Actuators. .437 2.875 .937 3/4 FLAT 1.750
7000 & 8000
[11] [73] [24] [19 mm] [45]
NUMBERS IN [ ] ARE FOR METRIC UNITS AND ARE IN mm.
B SHOCK PADS
Polyurethane pads for absorption of shock and noise are
available on each end of Series 1000-8000 Rotary Actuators.
Reducing shock permits higher piston velocities for shorter cycle
times. Reducing noise levels provides improved environment for
increased productivity. Pads eliminate metal-to-metal contact
between piston and end caps. NOTE: Air application only.
+.000 +.000 LETTER
.187 -.010 -.254 SERIES A B
G SHAFT SEAL COVERS
Not available on Rx6x and Rx9x models
1000 & 2000
1.875 .688
[47.63] [17.5]
3.000 1.688
3000 & 4000
[76.20] [42.9]
Fits all PHD Series 1000-8000, except when ordering hollow A DIA 3.250 1.688
5000 & 6000
shafts. Isolates internal or external pressures. Maximum pressure [82.55] [42.9]
differential is 500 psi [34.4 bar]. Furnished installed on actuator only 4.480 3.312
7000 & 8000
[113.79] [84.1]
(both sides). Covers are made of hard anodized aluminum. Not to be B REF
used as a pilot. NUMBERS IN [ ] ARE FOR METRIC
UNITS AND ARE IN mm.

CAT-03
BASIC SHAFT DIMENSIONS: R1xx and R2xx LETTER DIMENSION
PA PA IMPERIAL* METRIC**
1 SERIES PA V W V W
.875 .4998/.5003 1/8 x 1/16 x .625 — —
W KEYWAY 1000 & 2000
W KEYWAY [22] [12.69/12.71] [3.18 x 1.56 x 16] [12.00/11.97] [4 x 2.5 x 15]
4 2 1.875 .8748/.8753 3/16 x 3/32 x 1.500 — —
3000 & 4000
3 [48] [22.22/22.23] [4.75 x 2.36 x 38] [22.00/21.96] [6 x 3.5 x 32]
V DIA V DIA 1.875 1.124/1.125 1/4 x 1/8 x 1.500 — —
5000 & 6000
[48] [28.55/28.58] [6.35 x 3.18 x 38] [28.00/27.96] [8 x 5 x 40]
R1xx: 3.500 1.749/1.750 3/8 x 3/16 x 3.000 — —
R2xx: 7000 & 8000
DOUBLE SHAFT EXTENSION SINGLE SHAFT EXTENSION [89] [44.42/44.45] [9.53 x 2.36 x 76] [44.00/43.96] [12 x 5 x 56]
(FRONT & BACK OF UNIT) (FRONT OF UNIT) NOTES:
1) SHAFT KEYWAY: SHOWN AT MID-ROTATION
2) *IMPERIAL SHAFT UNITS (Rx1x, Rx3x, Rx5x. Rx8x)
3) **METRIC SHAFT UNITS (Rx6x, Rx9R)
K PRELOADED KEYWAY SHAFT For use with Hub Adaptors. See Transition Plates & Stanchions
Not available on Rx6x and Rx9x models section.
3C
E THREAD
F RAD LETTER DIMENSION
SERIES A B C D E F
F .375 1.500 .250 3/8-24 10-32 x .312 DP .156
1000 & 2000
[9.5] [38.1] [6.35] [M10] [M5 x 8] [4]
.812 2.000 .437 1/2-20 5/16-24 x .440 DP .220
+.010 +.254 3000 & 4000
C [20.6] [50.8] [11.11] [M12] [M8 x 11] [6]
-.000 -.000
.125
A [3.2] D THREAD B MIN DIA .812 3.000 .563 5/8-11 3/8-24 x .560 DP .251
5000 & 6000
ALLOWABLE [20.6] [76.2] [14.28] [M16] [M10 x 14] [6]
SHAFT KEYWAY: SHOWN AT MID-ROTATION 1.500 4.000 .875 1-8 1/2-20 x .687 DP .438
7000 & 8000
R2xx UNITS: WHEN ORDERING SPECIFY -K-K FOR PRELOAD ON BOTH SHAFT EXTENSIONS. PRELOAD [38.1] [101.6] [22.22] [M24] [M12 x 17.5] [11]
WILL BE ON OPPOSITE SIDES OF SHAFT.
SET SCREW: INCLUDED WITH UNIT
C CROSS KEY SHAFT

A SLOT DEPTH LETTER DIMENSION
E F SLOT WIDTH
SERIES A B C D E F
.250 .215 .230 .500 .118 .250
1000 & 2000
[6.4] [5.5] [5.8] [12.7] [3] [6.3]
.250 .265 .248 .875 .120 .248
3000 & 4000
[6.4] [6.7] [6.3] [22.2] [3] [6.3]
.437 .485 .500 1.125 .150 .5002
5000 & 6000
[11] [12.3] [12.7] [28.6] [3.8] [12.7]
.437 .805 .875 1.750 .245 .8752
7000 & 8000
[11] [20.4] [22.2] [44.5] [6.2] [22.2]
B SHAFT KEYWAY: SHOWN AT MID-ROTATION

A +.001 +.025 R2xx UNITS: WHEN ORDERING SPECIFY -C-C FOR
BOTH ENDS C -.000 -.000 CROSSKEY ON BOTH SHAFT EXTENSIONS
D DIA BOTH ENDS CROSSKEY: INCLUDED WITH UNIT
H HOLLOW SHAFT
LETTER DIMENSION
A PB A SERIES A PB VA WA
.042 1.920 .250 —
1000 & 2000
[1.1] [48.76] [6.35] —
WA KEYWAY
.042 2.917 .500 1/8 x 1/16
THRU 3000 & 4000
[1.1] [74.09] [12.7] [3.18 x 1.58]
.135 2.730 .687 3/16 x 3/32
5000 & 6000
[3.4] [69.34] [17.46] [4.76 x 2.38]
+.002 +.050 .240 4.520 1.125 1/4 x 1/8
VA -.000 -.000 DIA THRU 7000 & 8000
[6.1] [114.80] [28.57] [6.35 x 2.38]
3C-36 All dimensions are reference only unless specifically toleranced.

CAT-03
MAGNETIC PISTON FOR USE WITH
PHD PROXIMITY SWITCHES
See page 3C-29 for Hydraulic Pressure Ratings with these options.
See each ordering data for magnetic piston ordering information.
Switches and brackets must be ordered separately.
See Switches and Sensors section for complete switch information.
E HALL EFFECT SWITCHES M REED SWITCHES
The PHD Magnetic Reed Switches may be used in situations

Series 1000-8000 Rotary Actuators may be equipped with a
where the Hall Effect Switches are not applicable. As with the Hall
magnetic band (specify -E) on the pistons which activates externally
Effect Switches, a magnetic band (specify -M) on the pistons
mounted PHD Hall Effect Switches. These switches allow the
activates the externally mounted PHD Reed Switches. The Reed
interfacing of the PHD Actuators to various logic systems. This
Switches may be used to signal a programmable controller,
option is for use with the following switches.
sequencer, relay, or in some cases, a valve solenoid. This option is
for use with the following switches.
COMPACT HALL EFFECT SWITCHES
3C
PART NO. COLOR DESCRIPTION COMPACT REED SWITCHES
17503-2-06 Yellow NPN (Sink) Type 4.5-24 VDC, 6 foot cable PART NO. DESCRIPTION
17504-2-06 Red PNP (Source) Type 4.5-24 VDC, 6 foot cable 17502-2-06 White NPN (Sink) or PNP (Source) 4.5-24 VDC,
17523-2 Yellow NPN (Sink) Type 4.5-24 VDC, Quick Connect 6 foot cable
17524-2 Red PNP (Source) Type 4.5-24 VDC, Quick Connect 17509-3-06 Green AC Type 110-120 VAC with Current Limit,
6 foot cable
LIQUID RESISTANT HALL EFFECT SWITCH 17522-2 White NPN (Sink) or PNP (Source) 4.5-24 VDC,
PART NO. DESCRIPTION Quick Connect
15902-1 NPN (Sink) or PNP (Source) 4.5-24 VDC 17529-3 Green AC Type 110-120 VAC, Quick Connect
with Current Limit
SWITCH BRACKETS
LIQUID RESISTANT REED SWITCHES
PART NO.
PART NO. DESCRIPTION
SERIES COMPACT SWITCH LIQUID RESISTANT 15900-1 10 Watt 4.5-24 VDC or 110-120 VAC
1000 & 2000 17000-32-5 5142-32-3 15901-1 3 Amp 65-120 VAC
3000 & 4000 17000-34-5 5142-34-3
5000 & 6000 17000-38-0 5142-38-3
7000 & 8000 17000-39-0 5142-39-3
SENSOR/SET POINT MODULE

J Not available on Rx6x and Rx9x models
PHD offers a solid state sensor transducer along with a
Set Point Module which provides up to four adjustable sensing
positions throughout the 180° maximum sensing range. These
signals can be used as inputs to a programmable controller to signal
ends of rotation in addition to multiple signals during rotation for
indication of arc travelled.
The Set Point Module allows independent adjustment of each
sensing position and is available for 4.5 to 24 VDC current sinking
or current sourcing.
To order, specify -J option on Series 1000-8000 and -3 in the
appropriate option space for 018x50x and 018x75x.
SET POINT MODULE
9800-01-0300 NPN (Sink) 4.5-24 VDC
9800-01-0400 PNP (Source) 4.5-24 VDC
See Switches and Sensors section for information.
3C-37
CAT-03
COUNTERCLOCKWISE Output hub rotates in one direction only. It remains motionless
L UNIDIRECTIONAL CLUTCH while rack and pinion reverse. Clutch repeats within ±1/2°.
Assembly features a Torrington roller clutch. Spring loaded
brake shoes limit output shaft free wheeling, but are not intended for
Output hub will only rotate in counterclockwise stopping external loads.
direction at specific rotation ordered. CAUTION: Any angular error will accumulate; therefore, shot
pins or similar locators are necessary on index applications.
CLOCKWISE UNIDIRECTIONAL Maintain shot pin location during reversal of Rotary Actuator to
R CLUTCH guarantee that clutch shaft does not move due to external forces or
slight internal friction in clutch.
Output hub will only rotate in clockwise
direction at specific rotation ordered.
Overrun clutch for intermittent unidirectional shaft output,
available for Series 1000 through 6000. LETTER DIMENSION
SERIES A C D E Q
R
.281 2.938 2.000 1.500 2.000
R2xx ROTATION 1000 & 2000
1.656 [7.2] [74.6] [51] [38] [50.8]
AUXILLARY [42] 2X A DIA THRU TO .344 4.188 3.000 2.000 3.000
EXTENSION
3C
.375 [9.5] ACTUATOR BODY 3000 & 4000

[8.7] [106.3] [76] [50.8] [76.2]
.187 [4.7] .500/.502 [12.70/12.75]
DIA x .437 [11.1] DP .406 4.938 4.000 2.500 3.500
5000 & 6000
1 .873/.875 [10.3] [125.4] [102] [63.5] [88.9]
[22.17/22.22] DIA
4 2
3 LIMITING FACTORS
C MAX. INLET MAX. RADIAL OR
Q
1.625 [41] DIA
SERIES PRESSURE(psi)[bar] AXIAL LOAD (lb) [N]
1000 1052 [72] 5 [22]
.125/.126
2000 526 [36] 5 [22]
[3.17/3.20]
THRU DIA 3000 372 [25] 10 [44]
E 4000 186 [13] 10 [44]
1.250
OUTPUT HUB D 5000 174 [12] 15 [66]
[31.75]
6000 87 [6] 15 [66]
L ABOVE INLET PRESSURES PROVIDE A MAXIMUM TORQUE
ROTATION OF 414 in-lb [46.8 Nm] ALLOWED BY THE CLUTCH
N PILOT VALVE ACTUATOR

The PVA functions as a built-in pneumatic limit switch. An air
pressure signal is provided at the end-of-piston travel as the piston
seal uncovers an orifice in the block. Upon reversal of piston travel,
the pilot pressure is shut off and the pilot line is vented through the
rotary actuator housing.
Air pilot signal is provided approximately .03 inch [1 mm] prior
to end of piston travel (or 10 to 15 degrees prior to end of rotation).
For pneumatic use only.
PVA ports are located in position 1 unless otherwise specified.
Not available in conjunction with angle adjustment -A option.
.500 [12.7] .625 [16] SQ 2X 1/8 NPT [BSP]

MAX
PD PV TYP
CW SIGNAL PORT CCW SIGNAL PORT LETTER DIMENSION
PV
1
SERIES PD STANDARD W/-B
4 2 1.000 2.191 1.848
1000 & 2000
3 [25.4] [55.7] [46.9]
1.500 2.847 2.410
3000 & 4000
[38.1] [72.3] [61.2]
1.500 3.436 2.978
5000 & 6000
[38.1] [87.3] [75.6]
2.500 4.409 3.770
7000 & 8000
[63.5] [112] [95.8]
PVA UNITS WILL REQUIRE A MINIMUM
ROTATION OF 45°

CAT-03
PORT & PORT CONTROL LOCATIONS
STANDARD PORT LOCATION on all Series 1000-8000 Needles may not be located in same position as ports. See
Actuators is position 2. STANDARD PVA (-N) LOCATIONS are page 3C-16 for needle positions Air/Oil Tandem Actuators. See 3C-4
tubes I & II in position 1. STANDARD PORT CONTROL® AND for port and Port Control® positions on Miniature Rotary Actuators.
CUSHION ADJUSTMENT NEEDLES are located in end caps I & II
in position 1. Other port and adjusting needle locations are
available as specified.
5
1 1
4 2 I II 2 4
3 3
1 1
4 2 III IV 2 4
3 3
PORT POSITION 1 TOP RACK

I PORT POSITION 3 BOTTOM RACK Y TANDEM CAP ROTATED 180°
3C
This option positions the ports in position 1 on racks I & II and This option rotates the cap of an Air/Oil Tandem Rotary
in position 3 on racks III and IV. This allows access to the ports on Actuator 180°. This places the Port Control (and Cushion) needles
the “Top” and “Bottom” sides of the actuator. and the Tandem fitting in position 2. Standard position for these is
position 4.
Fluoro-Elastomer seals are available for service up to 400°F

[204°C]. They may also be used to achieve seal compatibility with
V FLUORO-ELASTOMER SEALS certain fluids. Seal compatibility should be checked with the fluid
manufacturer for proper application.
This option may be specified when a precise rotation is

required and angle adjustment (see page 3C-35) is not acceptable.
W CLOSE TOLERANCE ROTATION By specifying this option, rotation will be within a tolerance of
+30, -0 minutes. Standard tolerance is -0°, +10° of rotation.
Electroless nickel plating is done on all externally exposed

ferrous parts except the pinion shaft. This optional plating treatment
Z1 ELECTROLESS NICKEL PLATING gives an alternative method of protecting the unit from severe
environments.
NOTE: Standard plating is Zinc & Black Oxide.
MOUNTING FLANGE (HARDWARE INCLUDED)

F
BOTTOM MOUNTING FLANGE
4X E DIA A KIT NO. LETTER DIMENSION
THRU D SERIES IMPERIAL METRIC A B C D E F
1000 & 2000 13756 14320 4.250 [108] 2.000 [51] 1.625 [41.3] 2.625 [66.7] .281 [7.1] .250 [6.3]
3000 & 4000 13757 14321 4.500 [114] 3.000 [76] 2.375 [60.3] 3.875 [98.4] .406 [10.3] .437 [11.1]
B C 5000 & 6000 13758 14322 4.500 [114] 4.000 [102] 3.375 [85.7] 3.875 [98.4] .406 [10.3] .437 [11.1]
4X E DIA A SIDE MOUNTING FLANGE

THRU D KIT NO. LETTER DIMENSION
SERIES IMPERIAL METRIC A B C D E F G
1000 & 2000 13759 14316 4.250 [108] 2.000 [51] 1.375 [34.9] 3.625 [92.1] .281 [7.1] .250 [6.3] .625 [15.9]
B C 3000 & 4000 13760 14317 5.750 [146] 3.000 [76] 2.125 [54.0] 5.125 [130.2] .406 [10.3] .437 [11.1] 1.000 [25.4]
5000 & 6000 13761 14318 6.500 [165] 4.000 [102] 3.375 [85.7] 5.875 [149.2] .406 [10.3] .437 [11.1] 1.250 [31.8]
7000 & 8000 13762 14319 12.000 [305] 5.000 [127] 3.000 [76.2] 10.000 [254.0] .781 [19.8] .750 [19.1] 1.875 [47.6]
G DIA THRU

CAT-03
SAE PORTS FOR SAE Ports are available on most PHD hydraulic Rotary
S HYDRAULIC FLUID Actuators. The Series 1000 & 2000 Rotary Actuators require a boss
which is brazed to the caps.
Dimensions for this boss are shown below. Consult PHD for
optional port position or units with Port Controls.
SAE PORT THREAD

.650 .039 SEE CHART BELOW
[16.5] [1]
.625 [15.9] DIA

3C
PORT PORT BOSS REQUIRED TO

SERIES SIZE EXTEND ABOVE CAP SURFACE
ON SERIES 1000 & 2000 ONLY
1000 & 2000 7/16 - 20 SAE
3000 & 4000 7/16 - 20 SAE
5000 & 6000 9/16 - 18 SAE
7000 & 8000 3/4 - 16 SAE

CAT-03
INDEX:
Page 3D-2
SERIES RI Benefits
Page 3D-3
Dimensions
Pages 3D-4 to 3D-9
Low Profile, High Force
Engineering Data
Pages 3D-10 & 3D-11
Options
Accessories
SERIES RIxH Pages 3D-15 to 3D-18
Hollow Pinion
Actuator Selection
Sizing Example
Application Example
Page 3D-26
SERIES RI
Integral Air Lines for
Direct Pneumatic Coupling
3D-1
INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION CAT-03 www.phdinc.com/ri
3D
3D-2
TO ORDER SPECIFY:
Product, Series, Type, Design No.,
Bore Size, Rotation, and Options.
TYPE
www.phdinc.com/ri
(800) 624-8511
TORQUE ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
BORE Ø AT 87 psi AB - Angle adjustment with shock
S 25 mm 32 in-lb [3.6 Nm] pad installed both ends
SINGLE 32 mm 63 in-lb [7.1 Nm] AC - Angle adjustment with shock
RACK 50 mm 207 in-lb [23.4 Nm] HOLLOW PINION BORE Ø MID-POSITION pad installed counterclockwise 90°
D 25 mm 64 in-lb [7.2 Nm ] H - Hollow Pinion 25 mm 90° AW - Angle adjustment with shock
PRODUCT DOUBLE 32 mm 127 in-lb [14.3 Nm] Leave blank 32 mm On 3-position only pad installed clockwise 90°
R - Rotary RACK 50 mm 414 in-lb [46.8 Nm] if standard 50 mm Must be specified See note 1
3 R I D H 1 25 x 180 x 90 - NB - PB - AB - M
CAT-03
THREE POSITION SERIES DESIGN NO. ROTATION SHOCK ABSORBERS ROTATION SPEED CONTROL VALVE OPTIONS
UNITS I - Internal Passage 1 - Imperial 180° NB - Shock installed both directions PB - Rotational Speed Controls M - Reed Magnet,
Only 90° 5 - Metric NC - Shock installed counterclockwise both directions Solid State
Mid-position on NW - Shock installed clockwise PC - Rotational Speed Controls
Double Rack Units See note 1 counterclockwise
are available. PW - Rotational Speed Controls
clockwise
NOTE:
1) Either optional angle adjustments or shock absorbers must be
ordered on all units. (Either option is mandatory.) PORTING PLATE KITS Options may affect unit length.
2) Switches and switch bracket kits must be ordered separately. See unit dimension and options
UNIT KIT ! pages for adders.
UNIT ROTATION SPEED CONTROL SHOCK SIZE NUMBER
ORDERING DATA: SERIES RI ROTARY ACTUATOR
SIZE KIT NO. UNIT ABSORBER RIx125 71972 M

PRO
D
O
T
U
RIxx125 69195 SIZE KIT NO. RIx525 71997

CT
RISxx25 69146
CUS
S
RIxx525 69198 RIx132 71973

RIxx132 69196 RIDxx25 69153 RIx532 71998
F
RIxx532 69199 RISxx32 69147 RIx150 71975 IT D

TO E
NE
RIxx150 69196 RIDxx32 69154 RIx550 72000
SOLUTIONS FOR
RIxx550 69199 RISxx50 69147 Kits include:1 Porting Plate, 2 Locating Rings, CUSTOM ROTARY ACTUATORS ARE AVAILABLE.
NOTE: One port control fitting per kit RIDxx50 69156 4 Fasteners, Required O-Rings PLEASE CONSULT PHD.
BENEFITS: SERIES RI ROTARY ACTUATOR
COMMON BENEFITS Series RI
■ Available in three sizes and six torque ranges from 32 to
414 in-lb at 87 psi [3.6 to 46.8 Nm at 6 bar] and are available
in either imperial or metric versions.
■ Provide 0 to 180 degrees rotation and are infinitely adjustable
throughout the entire range.
■ Body and hub locating sleeve pins provide accurate location.
■ Zero backlash at ends of rotation for precise rotary positioning.
■ Optional three position units are available providing 90° mid SERIES RI BENEFITS: INTEGRAL AIR LINES
position on double rack units only. ■ Series RI Rotary Actuators incorporate internal air passages
■ PHD Series 6790 Switches or proximity switch ready are within the rotary pinion manifold to allow pneumatic coupling
available for interfacing to electrical controls. to other devices without tubing. Provides protection against
severed or damaged air lines eliminating downtime.
■ Optional shock absorbers or bumpers provide quiet operation
and end of rotation deceleration. ■ Hub manifold interface provides from 4 to 8 passages through
the pinion for maximum flexibility.
■ Optional port flow controls provide accurate control of
rotation speed. ■ Units incorporate a hollow pinion for routing and protecting
items such as electrical cable.
Series RIxH ■ Features enclosed inner tubing for protection from external
contaminants.
■ Porting plate accessory allows for quick and easy transition
between hub manifold and customer tooling or end effectors.
Cap Seal Shock

Available with a Hub Manifold Absorbers
Interface or a Hollow Pinion
SERIES RIxH BENEFITS: HOLLOW PINION

■ Series RIxH Rotary Actuators offer a hollow pinion which
provides routing and protection for electrical cables and air
lines. Cap
Piston
■ Series RIxH Rotary Actuators provide a lower cost and lower Cap Body
profile solution with a larger opening through the pinion. Unit Porting Pinion
(CW & CCW)
Internal Rack Assembly
SPECIFICATIONS Series RI Air Passages
PISTON SEALS Block Vee
PISTON Free Floating, Acetal Material
PINION SHAFT One Piece Alloy Steel with Center Through Hole
RACKS Alloy Steel
END CAPS Clear Anodized Aluminum
BEARINGS Two Radial Ball Bearings THEORETICAL TORQUE
PORTS NPT or BSPP in-lb/psi [Nm/bar]
BREAKAWAY PRESSURE 5 psi [0.35 bar] BORE SIZE
LUBRICATION Permanent for Non-Lube Air 25 32 50
WORKING PRESSURE 100 psi [7 bar] Maximum RIS .36 [.6] .73 [1.2] 2.37 [3.9]
STANDARD ROTATIONS Fully Adjustable (0 to 180°) RID .74 [1.2] 1.45 [2.4] 4.75 [7.8]
BACKLASH No Backlash at end of Rotation
LIFE Designed for 5,000,000 Trouble-Free Cycles
OPERATING TEMPERATURE: OPTIONS
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT UNIT AB, AC, AW -20° to 160°F [-28.9° to 71.1°C]
SHOCK ABSORBER UNIT NB, NC, NW 32° to 150°F [0° to 65.6°C]
ROTATION SPEED CONTROL UNIT PB, PC, PW 5° to 160°F [-15° to 71.1°C]
3D-3
DIMENSIONS: SERIES RISH ROTARY ACTUATOR SINGLE RACK
A
C A/2 4X J E 4X M HOLE X N DEEP
RIxx25 & RIxx32 ONLY
4X L THREAD
8X L THREAD
FOR RIxx50 ONLY
5 B D 6
4X G
4X H
Y THREAD THRU 2X F 4X K 2
ØU FF
2X BB
2X EE
S
R P 3 1
2X BB
3D
W W
AA AA
T
V Z 4X CC 2X DD
SEE PAGE 3D-18 FOR THREAD THRU Z V
PINION DETAIL JJ PORT T-SLOT DIMENSIONS
4
JJ PORT Y THREAD THRU
C C
2X Z PORT PLUG
SEE PORT PLUG
DETAIL FOR
METRIC UNITS
PORT PLUG
SEE PORT PLUG
Ø LL DETAIL FOR PORT PLUG DETAIL
MM Ø KK METRIC UNITS FOR METRIC UNITS
GG
HH
PORT PLUG
PER DIN 908
T
Ø PP
SECTION CC
UNIT LETTER DIMENSION

SIZE A B C D E F G H J K L M N P R S T
RISH125 5.425 3.071 .472 3.031 .472 1.477 .406 .738 1.823 1.698 M3 x 0.5 .102 .098 1.398 1.417 1.889 .417
RISH525 [137.8] [78.0] [12.0] [77.0] [12.0] [37.5] [10.3] [18.7] [46.3] [43.1] M3 x 0.5 [2.6] [2.5] [35.5] [36.0] [48.0] [10.6]
RISH132 6.384 3.858 .630 3.819 .630 1.969 .758 1.070 2.004 1.838 M3 x 0.5 .102 .118 1.890 1.909 2.519 .374
RISH532 [162.2] [98.0] [16.0] [97.0] [16.0] [50.0] [19.3] [27.2] [50.9] [46.7] M3 x 0.5 [2.6] [3.0] [48.0] [48.5] [64.0] [9.5]
RISH150 8.464 5.197 .630 5.157 .630 2.264 .575 1.204 2.557 2.328 M4 x 0.7 — — 2.638 2.657 3.454 .543
RISH550 [215.0] [132.0] [16.0] [131.0] [16.0] [57.5] [14.6] [30.6] [64.9] [59.1] M4 x 0.7 — — [67.0] [67.5] [87.7] [13.8]

SIZE U V W Y Z AA BB CC CC TOL± DD EE FF GG HH JJ
RISH125 1.969 .731 .618 M14 x 1.5 .709 .394 .197 .4715 .0004 5/16-24 .157 2.283 .197 5.819 10-32
RISH525 [50.0] [18.6] [15.7] M14 x 1.5 [18.0] [10.0] [5.0] [11.98] [.01] M8 x 1.25 [4.0] [58.0] [5.0] [147.8] M5 x 0.8
RISH132 2.520 .888 .854 M20 x 1.5 .787 .650 .197 .4715 .0004 5/16-24 .236 2.598 .315 7.014 1/8-27 NPT
RISH532 [64.0] [22.6] [21.7] M20 x 1.5 [20.0] [16.5] [5.0] [11.98] [.01] M8 x 1.25 [6.0] [66.0] [8.0] [178.2] 1/8-28 BSPP
RISH150 3.150 1.270 1.142 M20 x 1.5 1.535 .650 .419 .7077 .0004 1/2-20 .666 3.701 .315 9.094 1/8-27 NPT
RISH550 [80.0] [32.2] [29.0] M20 x 1.5 [39.0] [16.5] [10.6] [17.98] [.01] M12 x 1.75 [16.9] [94.0] [8.0] [231.0] 1/8-28 BSPP
UNIT
SIZE Ø PP Ø KK Ø LL MM
RISH125 2.244 .677 1.063 .236 METRIC INFORMATION SHOWN IN [ ].
RISH525 [57.0] [17.2] [27.0] [6.0] NOTES:
RISH132 2.677 .846 1.339 .276 1) PORT POSITIONS INDICATED BY CIRCLED NUMBERS.
RISH532 [68.0] [21.5] [34.0] [7.0] 2) PINION AND HUB SHOWN AT MID ROTATION.
RISH150 3.150 1.060 1.676 .354
RISH550 [80.0] [26.9] [42.6] [9.0]
3D-4
www.phdinc.com/ri CAT-03 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
DIMENSIONS: SERIES RIDH ROTARY ACTUATOR DOUBLE RACK
1 2
3
7
4
6 5
2
2X Y THREAD THRU
THIS END
3 1
W
AA
2X Z
4X JJ PORT 2X V
THIS END
4
2X Z
PORT PLUG DETAIL
5 6 FOR METRIC UNITS
PORT PLUG
PORT PLUG PER DIN 908
SEE PORT PLUG
DETAIL FOR GG
METRIC UNITS

SIZE E V W Y Z AA GG JJ
RIDH125 1.280 .731 .618 M14 x 1.5 .709 .394 .197 10-32
RIDH525 [32.5] [18.6] [15.7] M14 x 1.5 [18.0] [10.0] [5.0] M5 x 0.8
RIDH132 1.378 .888 .854 M20 x 1.5 .787 .650 .315 1/8-27 NPT
RIDH532 [35.0] [22.6] [21.7] M20 x 1.5 [20.0] [16.5] [8.0] 1/8-28 BSPP
RIDH150 1.378 1.270 1.142 M25 x 1.5 1.535 .650 .315 1/8-27 NPT
RIDH550 [35.0] [32.2] [29.0] M25 x 1.5 [39.0] [16.5] [8.0] 1/8-28 BSPP
METRIC INFORMATION SHOWN IN [ ].
NOTES:
1) PORT POSITIONS INDICATED BY CIRCLED NUMBERS.
2) PINION AND HUB SHOWN AT MID ROTATION.
3) FOR DIMENSIONS NOT GIVEN SEE RISH SINGLE RACK DIMENSION PAGE 3D-4.
3D-5
DIMENSIONS: SERIES RIS ROTARY ACTUATOR SINGLE RACK
A
C A/2 4X J E 4X M HOLE X N DEEP
RIxx25 & RIxx32 ONLY
4X L THREAD
8X L THREAD
FOR RIxx50 ONLY
1 2
3
5 B D 6
4X G
4
7
6 5
4X H
2X F 4X K
SEE PAGE 3D-8 FOR
PRESSURE OUTPUT
Y THREAD THRU HUB INTERFACE 2
ØU DIMENSIONS FF
2X BB
3D
2X EE
S
R P 3 1
2X BB
W W
AA AA
T
V Z 4X CC 2X DD
SEE PAGE 3D-18 FOR THREAD THRU Z V
JJ PORT T-SLOT DIMENSIONS
4
JJ PORT Y THREAD THRU
2X Z 6 5
PORT PLUG DETAIL PORT PLUG

7
FOR METRIC UNITS SEE PORT PLUG

8
1 2 DETAIL FOR
PORT PLUG METRIC UNITS
SEE PORT PLUG
DETAIL FOR
METRIC UNITS SEE PAGE 3D-8 FOR
PORT PLUG
PER DIN 908 PRESSURE INPUT
GG HUB INTERFACE
HH DIMENSIONS

RIS125 5.425 3.071 .472 3.031 .472 1.477 .406 .738 1.823 1.698 M3 x 0.5 .102 .098 1.417 1.398 1.889 .709
RIS525 [137.8] [78.0] [12.0] [77.0] [12.0] [37.5] [10.3] [18.7] [46.3] [43.1] M3 x 0.5 [2.6] [2.5] [36.0] [35.5] [48.0] [18.0]
RIS132 6.384 3.858 .630 3.819 .630 1.969 .758 1.070 2.004 1.838 M3 x 0.5 .102 .118 1.909 1.890 2.519 .787
RIS532 [162.2] [98.0] [16.0] [97.0] [16.0] [50.0] [19.3] [27.2] [50.9] [46.7] M3 x 0.5 [2.6] [3.0] [48.5] [48.0] [64.0] [20.0]
RIS150 8.464 5.197 .630 5.157 .630 2.264 .575 1.204 2.557 2.328 M4 x 0.7 — — 2.657 2.638 3.454 .787
RIS550 [215.0] [132.0] [16.0] [131.0] [16.0] [57.5] [14.6] [30.6] [64.9] [59.1] M4 x 0.7 — — [67.5] [67.0] [87.7] [20.0]

SIZE U V W Y Z AA BB CC CC TOL± DD EE FF GG HH JJ
RIS125 1.969 .731 .618 M14 x 1.5 .709 .394 .197 .4715 .0004 5/16-24 .157 2.283 .197 5.819 10-32
RIS525 [50.0] [18.6] [15.7] M14 x 1.5 [18.0] [10.0] [5.0] [11.98] [.01] M8 x 1.25 [4.0] [58.0] [5.0] [147.8] M5 x 0.8
RIS132 2.520 .888 .854 M20 x 1.5 .787 .650 .197 .4715 .0004 5/16-24 .236 2.598 .315 7.014 1/8-27 NPT
RIS532 [64.0] [22.6] [21.7] M20 x 1.5 [20.0] [16.5] [5.0] [11.98] [.01] M8 x 1.25 [6.0] [66.0] [8.0] [178.2] 1/8-28 BSPP
RIS150 3.150 1.270 1.142 M20 x 1.5 1.535 .650 .419 .7077 .0004 1/2-20 .666 3.701 .315 9.094 1/8-27 NPT
RIS550 [80.0] [32.2] [29.0] M20 x 1.5 [39.0] [16.5] [10.6] [17.98] [.01] M12 x 1.75 [16.9] [94.0] [8.0] [231.0] 1/8-28 BSPP
NOTES:
3D-6 All dimensions are reference only unless specifically toleranced.

DIMENSIONS: SERIES RID ROTARY ACTUATOR DOUBLE RACK
SEE PAGE 3D-8 FOR

PRESSURE OUTPUT
HUB INTERFACE 2
1
DIMENSIONS
3
7
4
6 5
2
2X Y THREAD THRU
THIS END
3 1
W
AA
2X Z
4X JJ PORT 2X V
THIS END
4
PORT PLUG DETAIL

FOR METRIC UNITS
2X Z 6 5
7
5 6
8
1 2
PORT PLUG
PORT PLUG PER DIN 908
SEE PORT PLUG
DETAIL FOR
METRIC UNITS
GG
SEE PAGE 3D-8 FOR PRESSURE INPUT
HUB INTERFACE DIMENSIONS
SIZE E V W Y Z AA GG JJ
RID125 1.280 .731 .618 M14 x 1.5 .709 .394 .197 10-32
RID525 [32.5] [18.6] [15.7] M14 x 1.5 [18.0] [10.0] [5.0] M5 x 0.8
RID132 1.378 .888 .854 M20 x 1.5 .787 .650 .315 1/8-27 NPT
RID532 [35.0] [22.6] [21.7] M20 x 1.5 [20.0] [16.5] [8.0] 1/8-28 BSPP
RID150 1.378 1.270 1.142 M25 x 1.5 1.535 .650 .315 1/8-27 NPT
RID550 [35.0] [32.2] [29.0] M25 x 1.5 [39.0] [16.5] [8.0] 1/8-28 BSPP
NOTES:
3) FOR DIMENSIONS NOT GIVEN SEE RIS SINGLE RACK DIMENSION PAGE 3D-6.
All dimensions are reference only unless specifically toleranced. 3D-7

DIMENSIONS: SERIES RI ROTARY ACTUATOR OUTPUT HUB
PRESSURE OUTPUT HUB O-RING INTERFACE
RIxx25 RIxx32 RIxx50
ØA 4X C THD x D DP 4X C THD x D DP
4X C THD x D DP
ØB ØB ØA
ØA ØB
A B C
A 2
L°
L°
1 B L°
1
C
3
2
1
8
4X K° 6X K° 8X K°
7
5
3
4
4
4
6 5
2X Ø H x R DP
ØE ØJ 2X Ø H x R DP
2X Ø H x R DP ØE ØJ
4X Ø F x G DP 8X Ø F x G DP
6X Ø F x G DP O-RING INTERFACE ØJ
3D
O-RING INTERFACE O-RING INTERFACE ØE
4X (G) 6X (G)
8X (G)
PRESSURE INPUT PORT INTERFACE

RIxx25 RIxx32 RIxx50
8X N CUSTOMER PORT
4X N CUSTOMER PORT 6X N CUSTOMER PORT
L° 6 5
L° 4 L°
3
4
4
5
7
3
4X K° 6X K° 8X K°
3
2
2
6
1
1
1 2
ØM
ØP ØM ØM
ØP ØP

SIZE A A TOL ± B C D E F G H H TOL ± J K° L° M N P R
RIS125 & RID125 1.969 .002 1.378 10-32 .472 .512 .177 .026 .2355 .0003 .197 90.0 45.0 1.575 10-32 2.244 .197
RIS525 & RID525 [50] [.05] [35.0] M5 x 0.8 [12.0] [13.0] [4.5] [.7] [5.98] [.008] [5.0] 90.0 45.0 [40.0] M5 x 0.8 [57.0] [5.0]
RIS132 & RID132 2.520 .002 1.811 1/4-28 .610 .630 .197 .026 .3147 .0003 .276 60.0 30.0 1.811 1/8-27 NPT 2.677 .315
RIS532 & RID532 [64.0] [.05] [46.0] M6 x 1.0 [15.5] [16.0] [5.0] [.7] [7.99] [.008] [7.0] 60.0 30.0 [46.0] 1/8-28 BSPP [68.0] [8.0]
RIS150 & RID150 3.150 .002 2.283 5/16-24 .797 .906 .276 .039 .3940 .0003 .433 45.0 22.5 2.362 1/8-27 NPT 3.150 .354
RIS550 & RID550 [80.0] [.05] [58.0] M8 x 1.25 [20.2] [23.0] [7.0] [1.0] [10.01] [.008] [11.0] 45.0 22.5 [60.0] 1/8-28 BSPP [80.0] [9.0]
NOTE:

DIMENSIONS: 3-POSITION UNITS
DOUBLE RACK
SIZE 25, 32 & 50
FOR DIMENSIONS NOT SHOWN HERE:
SERIES RIxH SEE PAGES 3D-4 AND 3D-5 PORT PLUG DETAIL FOR METRIC UNITS
SERIES RI SEE PAGES 3D-6 AND 3D-7
PORT PLUG
PER DIN 908
2 C KK
2X MM
1 3 5 6
AA NN
2X JJ PORT
Z (3 POSITION 2X JJ PORT
GG LL (UNIT CONTROL)
CONTROL)
4
2X ZZ PP 5
6
4
8
3
PORT PLUG 1 2
SEE PORT PLUG

DETAIL FOR
METRIC UNITS
2X JJ PORT
(UNIT CONTROL)
(0-90-180°) A
C B
NOTES:
A B C 1) PORT POSITIONS INDICATED BY CIRCLED NUMBERS.
P R P R PR 3) MID POSITION HOLDING TORQUE ON DOUBLE RACK
UNITS IS 1/2 CATALOGED OUTPUT TORQUE.
DOUBLE RACK DIMENSIONS

UNIT LETTER DIMENSION UNIT LETTER DIMENSION
SIZE AA JJ KK LL MM NN ZZ SIZE C Z GG PP
3RID125 .618 10-32 1.496 .354 .354 .618 .807 3RID125 .472 .709 .197 .295
3RID525 [15.7] M5 x 0.8 [38.0] [9.0] [9.0] [15.7] [20.5] 3RID525 [12.0] [18.0] [5.0] [7.5]
3RID132 .854 1/8-27 NPT 1.965 .492 .571 .854 1.161 3RID132 .630 1.496 .315 .472
3RID532 [21.7] 1/8-28 BSPP [49.9] [12.5] [14.5] [21.7] [29.5] 3RID532 [16.0] [38.0] [8.0] [12.0]
3RID150 1.142 1/8-27 NPT 2.362 .591 .701 1.142 1.870 3RID150 .630 1.890 .315 1.535
3RID550 [29.0] 1/8-28 BSPP [60.0] [15.0] [17.8] [29.0] [47.5] 3RID550 [16.0] [48.0] [8.0] [39.0]
METRIC INFORMATION SHOWN IN [ ]. METRIC INFORMATION SHOWN IN [ ].

ENGINEERING DATA: SERIES RI ROTARY ACTUATOR
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE AT 87 psi [6 bar] PISTON DIAMETER PISTON AREA AIR VOLUME (2 x 180)
UNIT SIZE in-lb Nm in mm in2 cm2 in3 cm3
RISxx25 32 3.6 0.98 25 0.76 4.90 2.24 36.71
RIDxx25 64 7.2 0.98 25 0.76 4.90 4.48 73.41
RISxx32 63 7.1 1.26 32 1.25 8.06 4.24 69.48
RIDxx32 127 14.3 1.26 32 1.25 8.06 8.49 139.13
RISxx50 207 23.4 1.97 50 3.04 19.61 14.94 244.82
RIDxx50 414 46.8 1.97 50 3.04 19.61 29.88 489.65
PRESSURE AND BREAKAWAY RATINGS ANGLE OF ROTATION

All Series RI Rotary Actuators have a maximum pressure rating Standard angle of rotation is 180°. Consult PHD for rotation
of 100 psi [7 bar] with a 5 psi [0.3 bar] breakaway pressure. They requirements above 180°. All units require angle adjustment or
are for pneumatic application only. shock absorber option which provide 90° adjustment from each end.
OPERATING TEMPERATURES ROTATIONAL ALLOWANCE

Standard Series RI Rotary Actuators are recommended for use The rotational allowance of the Series RI Rotary Actuator is 7°
3D
in temperatures from -20° to +160°F [-28° to +71°C]. If a PHD to 15° on the nominal specified rotation.
supplied external rotation speed control valve is used, the
temperature range is from 5° to 160°F [-15° to 71°C]. If a PHD
supplied shock absorber is used, the temperature range is from 32° to
ROTATION RATES
150°F [0° to 66°C]. Consult PHD for temperatures beyond this range. The speeds given in the chart on page 3D-11 reflect one cycle of
180° with no load applied at 87 psi [6 bar]. Times given are average
and include the deceleration time through each type stopping method.
LUBRICATION
All units are permanently lubricated at assembly for service
CONTROLS
of the rack and pinion using high grade bearing grease and by using Control of output hub speed is extremely important as inertia
lubricated air. force is a function of rotational speed and distance from load to
output hub center. Flow controls and shock absorbers should be
considered when inertial loads are applied. See pages 3D-11
BACKLASH through 3D-15 for information on Series RI Rotary Actuator
All units have 0° of backlash at ends of rotation. controls. See pages 3D-19 through 3D-21 for information on load
stopping capacity.
BACKLASH SPECIFICATIONS BEARING LOADS TABLE

BACKLASH BACKLASH REPEATABILITY MAXIMUM MAXIMUM RADIAL
MID THREE POSITION THREE POSITION AXIAL PAYLOAD AT
UNIT ROTATION REPEATABILITY UNIT UNIT UNIT PAYLOAD MOUNTING SURFACE
SIZE +/- (degrees) (degrees) +/- (degrees) +/- (degrees) SIZE lb N lb N
RISxx25 .26 0.14 1.25 0.16 RISxx25 292 1300 572 2546
RIDxx25 .26 0.53 1.25 0.16 RIDxx25 292 1300 572 2546
RISxx32 .23 0.42 0.35 0.1 RISxx32 511 2275 1206 5365
RIDxx32 .23 0.94 0.35 0.1 RIDxx32 511 2275 1206 5365
RISxx50 .21 0.12 0.2 0.06 RISxx50 697 3100 1850 8229
RIDxx50 .21 0.35 0.2 0.06 RIDxx50 697 3100 1850 8229

INPUT UNIT SIZE
PRESSURE RISxx25 RIDxx25 RISxx32 RIDxx32 RISxx50 RIDxx50
psi bar in-lb Nm in-lb Nm in-lb Nm in-lb Nm in-lb Nm in-lb Nm
40 2.7 14.7 1.7 29.5 3.3 29.1 3.3 58.2 6.6 95.1 10.7 190.2 21.5
50 3.4 18.4 2.1 36.9 4.2 36.4 4.1 72.7 8.2 118.9 13.4 237.8 26.9
60 4.1 22.1 2.5 44.2 5.0 43.6 4.9 87.3 9.9 142.7 16.1 285.3 32.2
70 4.8 25.8 2.9 51.6 5.8 50.9 5.8 101.8 11.5 166.4 18.8 332.9 37.6
80 5.5 29.5 3.3 59.0 6.7 58.2 6.6 116.4 13.1 190.2 21.5 380.4 43.0
90 6.2 33.2 3.7 66.3 7.5 65.4 7.4 130.9 14.8 214.0 24.2 428.0 48.4
100 6.8 36.9 4.2 73.7 8.3 72.7 8.2 145.4 16.4 237.8 26.9 475.5 53.7
3D-10
ENGINEERING DATA: SERIES RI ROTARY ACTUATOR
ROTARY ACTUATOR WEIGHT TABLES ROTARY ACTUATOR ROTATION RATE TABLE
(NO LOAD CONDITIONS)
SINGLE AND DOUBLE 3 POSITION ROTATION RATES at 87 psi
ROTARY ACTUATORS ROTARY ACTUATORS (seconds maximum)
UNIT ACTUATOR WEIGHT UNIT ACTUATOR WEIGHT UNIT shock speed
SIZE lb kg SIZE lb kg SIZE pad control shock
RISxx25 3 1.36 3 RIDxx25 4.1 1.86 RISxx25 0.13 0.18 0.18
RIDxx25 3.5 1.59 3 RIDxx32 9.6 4.36 RIDxx25 0.23 0.41 0.23
RISxx32 7.6 3.44 3 RIDxx50 17.6 7.98 RISxx32 0.11 0.11 0.31
RIDxx32 8 3.63 RIDxx32 0.28 0.30 0.32
RISxx50 14.3 6.48 RISxx50 0.13 0.22 0.29
RIDxx50 15 6.80 RIDxx50 0.28 0.40 0.78
MANIFOLD PINION SPECIFICATIONS

FLOW THROUGH CENTER THROUGH HOLE
UNIT NUMBER OF PASSAGES @ 87 psi [6 bar] DIAMETER
SIZE PASSAGES CFM Liter/Min in mm
RISx25 4 1 28.3 0.197 5
RIDx25 4 1 28.3 0.197 5
RISx32 6 1.3 36.8 0.276 7
RIDx32 6 1.3 36.8 0.276 7
RISx50 8 1.5 42.5 0.433 11
RIDx50 8 1.5 42.5 0.433 11
3D-11
OPTIONS: SERIES RI ROTARY ACTUATOR
ANGLE ADJUSTMENTS WITH

AB SHOCK PAD INSTALLED BOTH ENDS UNIT LETTER DIMENSION
SIZE A B C D
.200 2.578 .551 .770
ANGLE ADJUSTMENTS WITH RISx125
RISx525 [5.1] [65.5] [14.0] [19.6]
AC SHOCK PAD INSTALLED RISx132

RISx532
.240
[6.1]
3.392
[86.2]
.787
[20.0]
1.100
[27.9]
COUNTERCLOCKWISE 90° RISx150 .310 3.373 .787 1.360
RISx550 [7.9] [85.7] [20.0] [34.5]
ANGLE ADJUSTMENTS WITH SHOCK
AW PAD INSTALLED CLOCKWISE 90° UNIT
SIZE A
LETTER DIMENSION
B C D
RIDx125 .369 1.770 .551 1.094
RIDx525 [9.4] [45.0] [14.0] [27.8]
Angle adjustment options and/or shock absorber options must RIDx132 .424 2.644 .787 1.375
RIDx532 [10.8] [67.2] [20.0] [34.9]
be ordered on each unit. Both provide mechanical stops and angle RIDx150 .505 2.625 .984 1.750
adjustment of -90° from both ends of rotation. RIDx550 [12.8] [66.7] [25.0] [44.5]
The standard rotation for Series RI is 180°. The ability to adjust METRIC INFORMATION SHOWN IN [ ].
3D
over a wide range eliminates the need to order special units for UNIT ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
specific angles of rotation. SIZE KIT NO.*
The angle adjustment screw has a shock pad as standard RISxx25 69223-01
RIDxx25 69230-01
providing quiet actuator operation in less demanding applications.
RISxx32 69226-01
In more demanding applications, the optional shock absorbers RIDxx32 69231-01
should be specified to handle the higher energy dissipation. RISxx50 69226-01
RIDxx50 69233-01
*ANGLE ADJUSTMENT KITS INCLUDE:
FOR RISxx UNITS - 1 ANGLE ADJUSTMENT SCREW AND 1 NUT
FOR RIDxx UNITS - 1 ANGLE ADJUSTMENT SCREW, 1 NUT,
1 THREAD SEAL AND 1 SEAL WASHER
1 KIT REQUIRED PER END OF ADJUSTMENT DESIRED.
2X B
2X A
2X C 2X D
1 2
8
3
7
6 5
2X B
2X A
2X C
1 2
8
2X D
7
6 5

NB BOTH DIRECTIONS 2X B
SINGLE RACK 2X A

NC COUNTERCLOCKWISE DIRECTION 1 2
2X C 2X D
3
8
7
4
6 5

NW CLOCKWISE DIRECTION
Either angle adjustment options and/or shock absorber options
2X B
must be ordered on each unit. Both provide mechanical stops and DOUBLE RACK 2X A
angle adjustment of -90° from both ends of rotation.
The shock absorber options provide maximum deceleration
control and rotational stopping ability. The -NB, -NC, and -NW 2X C
options provide the rotary actuator with the shock absorber factory 1 2
3
8
installed in the Series RI rotary actuator. See pages 3D-19 through
7
2X D
4
6 5
3D-21 for details on unit stopping capacity with installed shock

absorbers. Reference the Shock Absorber Specifications Chart for
nominal effective angle of rotation in each direction.
LETTER DIMENSION LETTER DIMENSION

UNIT A B C D UNIT A B C D
RIS125 .200 2.847 .551 .770 RID125 .369 2.039 .551 1.094
RIS525 [5.1] [72.3] [14.0] [19.6] RID525 [9.4] [51.8] [14.0] [27.8]
RIS132 .240 3.263 .787 1.100 RID132 .424 2.515 .787 1.375
RIS532 [6.1] [82.9] [20.0] [27.9] RID532 [10.8] [63.9] [20.0] [34.9]
RIS150 .310 3.924 .787 1.360 RID150 .505 3.176 .984 1.750
RIS550 [7.9] [99.7] [20.0] [34.5] RID550 [12.8] [80.7] [25.0] [44.5]
METRIC INFORMATION SHOWN IN [ ]. METRIC INFORMATION SHOWN IN [ ].
NOTE: FOR RISxxx UNITS WITH CUSHION USE RIDxxx DIMENSION L

SHOCK KINETIC SHOCK ACROSS SHOCK
SHOCK THREAD ABSORBER ENERGY ABSORBER WRENCH ABSORBER
UNIT ABSORBER TYPE STROKE WEIGHT LOAD LENGTH FLATS EFFECTIVE
SIZE KIT NO. mm in mm lb kg in-lb Nm in mm in mm ANGLE
RISxx25 69146 M14 x 1.5 .50 12.7 .12 .05 150 17 3.59 91.2 .49 12.4 30
RIDxx25 69153 M14 x 1.5 .50 12.7 .12 .05 150 17 3.59 91.2 .49 12.4 30
RISxx32 69147 M20 x 1.5 .75 19.1 .28 .13 225 25 4.67 118.6 .69 17.5 70
RIDxx32 69154 M20 x 1.5 .625 15.9 .28 .13 225 25 4.67 118.6 .69 17.5 60
RISxx50 69147 M20 x 1.5 .75 19.1 .28 .13 225 25 4.67 118.6 .69 17.5 55
RIDxx50 69156 M25 x 1.5 .91 23.1 .76 .34 1860 210 5.51 140.0 .88 22.2 70
SHOCK ABSORBERS KITS INCLUDE:
FOR RISxx UNITS - 1 SHOCK AND 1 NUT
FOR RIDxx UNITS - 1 SHOCK, 1 NUT, 1 THREAD SEAL,
AND 1 SEAL WASHER
1 KIT REQUIRED PER END OF ADJUSTMENT DESIRED
NOTE: The shock absorber doubles as the rotation adjustment. should be used in Series RI Rotary Actuators. The use of any other
Shock absorbers or angle adjustment option must be installed in the shock absorbers will affect actuator performance and life
rotary actuator prior to operating the unit. Operation of units without expectancy.
installed shocks or angle adjustment can damage the units and void PHD recommends replacing shocks every 1,000,000 cycles to
any and all warranties. Only shock absorbers specified by PHD maintain peak actuator performance and life.

ROTATION SPEED CONTROL
PB BOTH DIRECTIONS
SIZE
RIxx125
RIxx525
A
.984
B
.827
[25.0] [21.0]
C
.197
[5.0]
D
.630
[16.0]
E
.394
[10.0]
F
.156
[4.0]
RIxx132 1.614 1.043 .069 .817 .650 .250
RIxx532 [41.0] [26.5] [1.8] [20.8] [16.5] [6.4]
ROTATION SPEED CONTROL 1.693 1.043 .069 .743 .650 .250
PC COUNTERCLOCKWISE DIRECTION
RIxx150
RIxx550 [43.0] [26.5] [1.8]
[18.9] [16.5] [6.4]
UNIT ROTATION SPEED CONTROL

SIZE KIT NO.
PW CLOCKWISE DIRECTION
RIxx125
RIxx525
RIxx132
69195
69198
69196
RIxx532 69199
The PHD Series RI offers optional external compact flow RIxx150 69196
control fittings for adjusting output hub rotation speed. The speed of RIxx550 69199
the hub is controlled by regulating the cylinder exhaust. The control 1 KIT REQUIRED PER END
OF ADJUSTMENT DESIRED A
Ø F TUBE SIZE
fittings are unidirectional flow control valves where intake air flows NOTE: ONE PORT CONTROL
freely through the flow control and exhaust is metered out through FITTING PER KIT B
3D
an adjustment screw. Intake capacity is slightly greater than the full

open exhaust capacity, enabling maximum variation of hub rotation C
speed.
The PHD Series RI flow control fittings are mounted directly to
the caps and provide an integral tube fitting connection. They also
D
swivel 360° around the ports, easing tube routing installation.
Rotational velocities are adjusted and maintained by the captivated
fine adjustment screw with a locking nut to ensure precise velocity E
control and repeatability in output hub rotation speed.
NOTE: Flow control fitting is effective between 15 to 100 psi
[1.0 to 7.0 bar] and from 5° to 160°F [-15° to 71.1°C].
MAGNETS FOR PHD 6790 SOLID

M STATE AND REED SWITCHES SOLID STATE SWITCH SPECIFICATIONS
UNIT REPEATABILITY HYSTERESIS BAND WIDTH
This option equips the rotary actuator with magnets on the rack SIZE (degree) (degree) (min. degree) (max. degree)
RIxxx25 0.6 10.6 31 50
for use with PHD Series 6790 Solid State Switches. These switches RIxxx32 0.6 9.3 28 51
mount easily to the actuator using the switch slots in the sides of RIxxx50 0.4 5.9 26 42
the body.
PHD Series 6790 Solid State and Reed Switches are designed REED SWITCH SPECIFICATIONS
specifically to provide an input signal to various types of UNIT REPEATABILITY HYSTERESIS BAND WIDTH
programmable controllers or logic systems. See Switches and SIZE (degree) (degree) (min. degree) (max. degree)
Sensors section for ordering information on the Series 6790 RIxxx25 0.6 9.5 27 44
RIxxx32 0.8 7.4 26 43
Switches. RIxxx50 0.6 5.1 26 36
SOLID STATE SWITCHES

67903-1-02 NPN 4.5 - 30 VDC, 2 m cable
67903-1-05 NPN 4.5 - 30 VDC, 5 m cable
67923-1 NPN 4.5 - 30 VDC, Quick Connect
67904-1-02 PNP 4.5 - 30 VDC, 2 m cable
67904-1-05 PNP 4.5 - 30 VDC, 5 m cable
67924-1 PNP 4.5 - 30 VDC, Quick Connect
REED SWITCHES
67902-1-02 PNP or NPN 4.5 - 30 VDC, 2 m cable
67902-1-05 PNP or NPN 4.5 - 30 VDC, 5 m cable
SWITCH INTO GROOVE 67922-1 PNP or NPN 4.5 - 30 VDC, Quick Connect
IN EITHER SIDE

ACCESSORIES: SERIES RI ROTARY ACTUATOR
EXTERNAL PROXIMITY SWITCHES
This accessory provides for the external mounting of round
metal sensing proximity switches. One switch mounting kit is
required per switch and includes the plastic bracket with the
required mounting hardware. A steel switch target is also included
in each external proximity switch mounting kit.
The Series RI body accepts up to four external proximity
switches. The typical application requires two switch mounting kits,
however, if the three position model has been ordered, the three
position switch bracket kit must also be ordered. This kit utilizes the
top target groove in the hub and therefore positions the proximity
switch higher from the body.
Proximity switches are supplied by the customer, see chart
below for switch diameter specifications, dimension C.
Ø C PROXIMITY SWITCH
BRACKET ASSEMBLY
3RIxxx25 ONLY
STANDARD BRACKET
3 POSITION BRACKET
A
STANDARD BRACKET
A
B UNIT LETTER DIMENSION
SIZE A B C
3 POSITION BRACKET RIxx125 .504 .413 .197
RIxx525 [12.8] [10.5] [5.0]
A RIxx132 .571 .452 .197
RIxx532 [14.5] [11.5] [5.0]
RIxx150 .748 .571 .315
RIxx550 [19.0] [14.5] [8.0]
VIEW AA
UNIT STANDARD PROXIMITY UNIT 3 POSITION PROXIMITY

SIZE KIT NO. SIZE KIT NO.
RIxxx25 69181 3 RIDxx25 70207
RIxxx32 69182 3 RIDxx32 70208
RIxxx50 69184 3 RIDxx50 70209
STANDARD PROXIMITY KITS INCLUDE: 3 POSITION PROXIMITY KITS INCLUDE:
1 TARGET ASSEMBLY 1 TARGET ASSEMBLY
- 1 CAM PIN - 1 CAM PIN
- 1 TARGET - 1 TARGET
1 BRACKET OR BRACKET ASSEMBLY WITH 1 BRACKET OR BRACKET ASSEMBLY WITH
REQUIRED MOUNTING HARDWARE REQUIRED MOUNTING HARDWARE
3D-15
PORTING PLATE FASTENER
This accessory provides a convenient conversion from the LOCATION MARK
CUSTOMER PORTING PLATE
manifold output hub interface to a threaded port interface. It allows
LOCATING RING
the use of the manifold hub feature of the Series RI Rotary Actuator, O-RING
without the need to drill communication holes through the attached LOCATION MARK
tooling. It also allows the plumbing of secondary actuators using the
fittings and tubing of your choice.
The Porting Plate is made from 6061-T6 aluminum and is
machined on all sides insuring flat and parallel mounting surfaces.
Four drilled and tapped holes are provided to attach your tooling. RIxx25 UNIT SHOWN AT MID-ROTATION
Location accuracy is maintained through the use of locating rings
SCREW REQUIRED
and dowel pin holes. KIT SIZE SCREW TORQUE
The Porting Plate also features numbered ports corresponding UNIT NUMBER (SHCS) in-lb Nm
to the rotary actuator input ports. A location mark keeps proper port RIx125 71972 10-32 x .5 75 8.5
alignment simple during assembly. RIx525 71997 M5 x 0.8 x 12 75 8.5
RIx132 71973 1/4-28 x .75 150 16.9
RIx532 71998 M6 x 1.0 x 22 150 16.9
RIx150 71975 5/16-24 x .875 250 28.2
RIx550 72000 M8 x 1.25 x 25 250 28.2
3D
KITS INCLUDE:1 PORTING PLATE, 2 LOCATING RINGS,

4 FASTENERS, REQUIRED O-RINGS
SERIES RIxx25 PORT ID # ON ALL SIDES SERIES RIxx32

C PORT ID # ON ALL SIDES
G
SERIES RI A
F G ROTARY PORT
INTERFACE F
E 4X THRU 4X THRU AND COUNTERBORE
K AND COUNTERBORE E K
4X L 4X L FOR H SHCS
4X A FOR H SHCS RADIUS
RADIUS A A
ØJ
ØJ
LOCATION B B
Ø M THRU MARK
Ø M THRU
ØN ØS ØS
ØN
4X U THREAD
4X U THREAD THRU 2X Ø R THRU (ON Ø S BOLT HOLE CIRCLE)
2X 15° (ON Ø S BOLT HOLE CIRCLE) (ON Ø N BOLT 4X 45° CUSTOMER MOUNTING
CUSTOMER MOUNTING HOLE CIRCLE)
4X 45° CUSTOMER LOCATION MARK SERIES RI
2X Ø R THRU MOUNTING 6X D PORT C ROTARY PORT
4X D PORT (ON Ø N BOLT HOLE CIRCLE) INTERFACE
CUSTOMER MOUNTING A
SERIES RIxx50 PORT ID # ON ALL SIDES

UNIT
SIZE A B
LETTER DIMENSION
C D E F
RIx125 .138 — — 10-32 .472 .197
A G
RIx525 [3.5] — — [M5 x 0.8] [12.0] [5.0]
RIx132 .571 .945 .413 1/8 NPT .906 .276
RIx532 [14.5] [24.0] [10.5] [1/8 BSPP] [23.0] [7.0]
E F 4X THRU AND COUNTERBORE RIx150 .315 1.024 — 1/8 NPT .984 .433
FOR H SHCS
K RIx550 [8.0] [26.0] — [1/8 BSPP] [25.0] [11.0]
A 4X L
RADIUS A UNIT LETTER DIMENSION
SIZE G H J K L M
ØJ
RIx125 .197 10-32 1.378 1.969 1.181 .197
RIx525 [5.0] [M5 x 0.8] [35.0] [50.0] [30.0] [5.0]
4X B RIx132 .276 1/4-28 1.811 2.559 1.496 .276
RIx532 [7.0] [M6 x 1.0] [46.0] [65.0] [38.0] [7.0]
Ø M THRU ØS RIx150 .433 5/16-24 2.283 2.953 1.732 .433
RIx550 [11.0] [M8 x 1.25] [58.0] [75.0] [44.0] [11.0]
ØN 4X U THREAD UNIT LETTER DIMENSION
(ON Ø S BOLT HOLE CIRCLE) SERIES RI ROTARY
SIZE N R S U
CUSTOMER MOUNTING PORT INTERFACE
4X 45° RIx125 1.496 .1252 2.047 10-24
LOCATION MARK RIx525 [38.0] [3.005] [52.0] [M5 x 0.8]
2X Ø R THRU RIx132 1.969 .1252 2.598 1/4-20
8X D PORT (ON Ø N BOLT HOLE CIRCLE) [50.0] [3.005] [66.0] [M6 x 1.0]
A RIx532
CUSTOMER MOUNTING RIx150 2.126 .2503 2.913 5/16-18
RIx550 [54.0] [6.007] [74.0] [M8 x 1.25]

3D-16
MANIFOLD O-RING SEAL KIT
This accessory provides the necessary O-rings to fit the
manifold hub of the Series RI Rotary Actuator. This allows the rotary
actuator to easily interface to customer supplied tooling. The
O-rings are 70 durometer, Buna-N rubber.
MANIFOLD O-RING SEAL KIT SPECIFICATIONS

O-RING NUMBER OF
UNIT MANIFOLD O-RINGS O-RING
SIZE KIT NO. IN KIT SIZE
RIxx25 69202 10 2 mm I.D. x 1 mm C.S.
RIxx32 69203 10 3 mm I.D. x 1 mm C.S.
RIxx50 69205 10 4 mm I.D. x 1.5 mm C.S.
LOCATION RINGS
These accessories provide accurate body and hub positioning.
The location sleeve fits into either the top or bottom H7 tolerance
counter bore holes on the PHD Series RI body or hub. They provide
dowel pin accuracy without requiring the additional space for a
dowel. Location rings allow either through bolt or tapped body
mounting to be used. The mounting bolt is placed through the
location ring, simultaneously securing and locating the mating parts.
The body locating ring kit consist of two hardened and ground
steel sleeves sized to press into the H7 tolerance counter bored
holes on either the top or bottom of the Series RIS body.
The hub locating ring kit consists of two hardened and ground
steel sleeves, sized to press into the hub counter bores located on
the top of the Series RI hub.
PINION LOCATING RING KIT

2X G PINION
UNIT LOCATING RING I.D.
LETTER DIMENSION
SIZE A B ØC C TOL. D E ØF F TOL. ØG ØH
RIxx125 .236 2.953 .472 +.0002/-.0005 .118 1.378 .236 +.0001/-.0007 .197 .354 1 2
[6.0] [75.0] [12.0] +[.005]/-[.013] [3.0] [35.0] [6.0] +[.003]/-[.018] [5.0] [9.0]
8
RIxx525
3
7
RIxx132 .236 3.937 .472 +.0002/-.0005 .079 1.811 .315 +.0001/-.0007 .236 .354 6 5
RIxx532 [6.0] [100.0] [12.0] +[.005]/-[.013] [2.0] [46.0] [8.0] +[.003]/-[.018] [6.0] [9.0]
RIxx150 .349 4.528 .709 -.0002/-.0006 .276 2.283 .394 +.0001/-.0007 .315 .591
RIxx550 [8.9] [115.0] [18.0] -[.005]/-[.015] [7.0] [58.0] [10.0] +[.003]/-[.018] [8.0] [15.0]
BODY LOCATING RING KIT
NOTE: LOCATING RINGS ARE TO BE PRESSED INTO BODY AND PINION E D
2X F
A
UNIT BODY LOCATING RING

SIZE KIT NO.
RIxxx25 69210
RIxxx32 69210
RIxxx50 69212
BODY LOCATING RING KITS INCLUDE 4X C
A 2X B
2 LOCATING RINGS 4X H BODY
LOCATING RING I.D.
UNIT PINION LOCATING RING
SIZE KIT NO. 6 5
RIxxx25 69216
7
4
3
8
RIxxx32 69217 1 2
RIxxx50 69219
PINION LOCATING RING KITS INCLUDE
2 LOCATING RINGS
BODY LOCATING RING KIT

3D-17
T-NUTS L
NON-USABLE
T-nuts allow the rotary actuator to be mounted from the side of SLOT LENGTH
the unit. T-nuts can be positioned at any point along the t-slot
grooves which are 90° to the pinion hub.
INSERT NUTS ON THIS END
OF UNIT, EITHER SIDE.
SLOT DIMENSIONS
TYPICAL BOTH SIDES (POSITION 1 & 3)
2X D
4X C
2X A
NUT DIMENSIONS
K THREAD E
K THREAD G
M
2X B
H H
J F
J F
3D
Size 25 Sizes 32 & 50

UNIT SLOT DIMENSION NUT DIMENSIONS NUT
SIZE A B C D E F G H J K L M PART NO.
RIxx125 .177 .315 .079 .138 — .095 — .252 .217 M3 x 0.5 .472 .630
RIxx525 [4.5] [8.0] [2.0] [3.5] — [2.4] — [6.4] [5.5] [12.0] [16.0] 3204-022
RIxx132 .240 .472 .088 .157 .216 .374 .050 .137 .472 M4 x 0.7 .669 .787
RIxx532 [6.1] [12.0] [2.2] [4.0] [5.5] [9.5] [1.3] [3.5] [12.0] [17.0] [20.0] 63759-xx
RIxx150 .240 .472 .088 .157 .216 .374 .050 .137 .472 M4 x 0.7 .669 .984
RIxx550 [6.1] [12.0] [2.2] [4.0] [5.5] [9.5] [1.3] [3.5] [12.0] [17.0] [25.0] 63759-xx

-xx = -00 INDICATES STANDARD PLATING -03 INDICATES -Z1 PLATING
APPLICATION EXAMPLES
LATHE LOADER CAM SHAFT FINISHING PROCESS
In this application, a combination of a slide, two grippers, and In this application, two grippers are combined with a Series RI
a rotary actuator load and unload parts from a lathe. One Series Rotary Actuator to load and unload cam shafts into a grinding
190 Gripper grasps a blank part on a holding rack while another machine for finishing. First a Series SK Slide, mounted to a gantry,
Series 190 Gripper grasps a finished part in the lathe. A Series SK will provide the reaching motion as a Series
Slide extends out, and the finished part is removed from the lathe 5300 Gripper picks up the unfinished cam
while the blank part is removed from the holding rack. A Series RI shaft. The Series RI Rotary Actuator
Rotary Actuator then rotates clockwise. The slide retracts, the blank rotates the grasped cam to the top
part is loaded into the lathe, and the finished part is released into a position. The gantry then cycles back
holding bin. The Series RI Rotary Actuator is beneficial for this to the grinding machine, the
application due to its high torque output and the capability of second gripper is extended down
routing airlines and switch cables through the pinion. This feature into the machine to pick up the
eliminates any external airlines, which could wear or sever causing finished cam shaft, the slide
catastrophic damage. retracts, the rotary actuator
rotates the grippers and
shafts, and the unfinished
cam is loaded into the
machine. Finally the
finished cam shaft is moved
and placed in a completion
tray on a conveyor. The
Series RI Rotary Actuator is
ideal for this application
due to its high torque
output and the capability of
routing airlines and switch
cables through the pinion.
3D-18
ROTARY ACTUATOR SELECTION: SERIES RI
SIZING AN RI UNIT WITH
ANGLE ADJUSTMENTS
STEP 1 STEP 5
Determine Rotational Mass Moment of Inertia (Jm) Compare Peak Velocity (ω) to Allowable Impact
Select the illustration from the application types on page Compare your peak velocity to the maximum allowable
3D-22 that most resembles your specific application. Several velocity for the given Mass Moment of Inertia (Jm) of your
separate calculations may be necessary to fully describe your application. The chart is labeled Shock Pad Energy
application. Using the appropriate application equation, Capacity. The charts represent the total amount of energy that
calculate the mass moment of inertia for the type of condition is able to be absorbed and provide acceptable motion of the
illustrated. The total mass moment of inertia is the sum of the actuator. Acceptable motion is defined as a maximum of one
individual calculations. degree of motion reversal when the load comes to end of
stroke. Note: You may run slightly higher velocities and loads
STEP 2 than these charts provide and not damage the unit; however,
Determine Necessary Acceleration (αs) you may find the motion profile unacceptable. Please contact
This equation calculates the acceleration required to move the PHD if you are considering using the Series RIx actuator
desired rotation in the desired time. The solution is given in outside of the recommended energy range and shock
radians/sec2. absorbers are not a desired option. If the shock pad does not
.035 x Rotation Angle in Degrees provide enough stopping capacity for your application, go to
Acceleration (rad/sec2) = αS = the next sizing section titled “Sizing a RIx Unit with Shocks.”
STEP 3 SHOCK PAD ENERGY CAPACITY

6.0
Calculate the Required Starting Torque (TA)
ALLOWABLE IMPACT VELOCITY (rad/sec)
Select the illustration from the application types on page

5.0
3D-22 that most resembles your specific application.
Several separate calculations may be necessary to fully describe 4.0
your application. Using the appropriate application equation,
calculate the torque for each for each type of condition 3.0
illustrated that matches your application. The total torque will
be the sum of the individual calculations. Note: Torque 2.0
calculations are theoretical, an appropriate safety factor 25 mm 50 mm
should be considered. PHD recommends a minimum safety 1.0
32 mm
factor of 2 to account for friction loss, airline and valve size,
and attached accessories. 0
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
[.0565] [.113] [.170] [.226] [.283] [.339] [.396] [.452] [.508] [.565]
Starting Torque (in/lb) = TA, TAg ATTACHED LOAD, Jm (in-lb sec2) [Nms2]
Balanced Load TA = Jm x αA x SF
UnBalanced Load TAg = [(Jm x αA) + (Fg x k)] x SF
STEP 4
Calculate the Peak Velocity (ω)
This formula estimates the peak velocity of the Series RIx in
operation, and is used to determine the stopping capacity of
the rotary actuator. The solution is given in radians/sec.
Average Velocity (deg/sec) = Rotational Angle in Degrees

Time of Rotation in Seconds
UNIT Peak Velocity (rad/sec)

SIZE
RISxx25 .045 x Average Velocity
RIDxx25 .026 x Average Velocity
3D-19
SIZING AN RI UNIT WITH SHOCKS STEP 7
STEP 6 Calculate the Kinetic Energy (Ke)
Compare Peak Velocity (ω) to Allowable Impact This formula calculates the kinetic energy of your application.
Compare your peak velocity to the maximum allowable This value will be used to calculate the actual total energy to be
velocity for the given Mass Moment of Inertia (Jm) of your compared to the maximum allowable total energy.
application. The chart is labeled Shock Energy Kinetic Energy (in/lb [Nm]) = Ke = 1/2 Jm ω2
Capacity. The charts represent the total amount of energy that
is able to be absorbed and provide acceptable motion of the STEP 8
actuator. Acceptable motion is defined as a maximum of one Calculate the Propelling Energy (Pe)
degree of motion reversal when the load comes to end of These formulas calculate the additional amount of energy that
stroke. Note: You may run slightly higher velocities and loads the shock will experience due to the piston force of the actuator.
than these charts provide and not damage the unit; however, UNIT Pe = Propelling Energy
you may find the motion profile unacceptable. Please contact SIZE in/lb Nm
PHD if you are considering using the Series RIxxx actuator RISxx25 .1902 x psi .3116 x bar
outside of the recommended energy range. RIDxx25 .3804 x psi .6233 x bar
RISxx32 .935 x psi 1.5321 x bar
RIDxx32 1.621 x psi 2.6556 x bar
SHOCK ENERGY CAPACITY RISxx50 2.283 x psi 3.7411 x bar
3D

30.0
RISx25 and RIDx25 STEP 9
25.0
Calculate the Total Energy (Et)
RISx32 This formula sums all of the energies that the shock will experience.
VELOCITY (rad/sec)
20.0 Total Energy Et (in/lb [Nm]) = Ke + Pe

15.0
STEP 10
Compare the Total Energy (Et) to the Maximum Total Energy (Em)
10.0 RIDx32
and also Acceptable Motion (Ea)
5.0 If Acceptable Motion is desired as defined in STEP 6, the total
energy should be less than both of the charted values given
0
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
below. If some additional bounce is acceptable, (Et) can be up
[.057] [.113] [.170] [.226]
2
[.283]
2
[.339] to the same value as (Em). If not, go to a larger actuator or
Moment of Inertia (in-lb sec ) [Nms ]
contact PHD for application assistance.
50.0
RISx32 and RIx32 STEP 11
45.0
40.0
Calculate Energy per Hour (Eh)
Compare your applications energy per hour requirement
VELOCITY (rad/sec)
35.0 RISx32
against the charted maximum.
30.0
25.0 Energy/Hour (in/lb [Nm]) = Cycles/Hour x Et
20.0 MAX ALLOWABLE CHART (Em)
15.0 Ke*
RIDx32 UNIT Energy/Hour
10.0 SIZE in-lb Nm in-lb/Hr Nm/Hr
5.0 RISxx25 75 8.5 300,000 33,890
0 RIDxx25 75 8.5 300,000 33,890
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
[.057] [.113] [.170] [.226] [.283] [.339] [.395] [.452] [.508] [.565] RISxx32 225 25.4 400,000 45,190
Moment of Inertia (in-lb sec2) [Nms2] RIDxx32 255 25.4 400,000 45,190
RISxx50 225 25.4 400,000 45,190
30.0
RISx50 and RIDx50 RIDxx50 1860 210.2 600,000 67,791
25.0 RISx50
ACCEPTABLE MOTION CHART (Ea)
VELOCITY (rad/sec)
20.0 UNIT Ke* Velocity

SIZE in-lb Nm rad/sec
15.0 RISxx25 64.4 7.3 27.5
RIDx50 RIDxx25 75.0 8.5 15.7
10.0 RISxx32 155.0 17.5 47.1
RIDxx32 205.0 23.2 20.9
5.0
RISxx50 225.0 25.4 28.8
0
RIDxx50 663.7 75.0 19.6
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0
[.113] [.226] [.339] [.452] [.565] [.678] [.791] *Acceptable motion is defined as a maximum of one degree of motion
Moment of Inertia (in-lb sec2) [Nms2] reversal when the load comes to end of stroke.
3D-20
DETERMINING ALLOWABLE ATTACHED
LOAD WEIGHT
Following are the steps required to determine the allowable STEP 15
attached load weight on the Series RIx rotary actuator. You will need Calculate the Deceleration (αd)
to know the weight of the attached load, the orientation of the rotary, This formula calculates the deceleration of the unit based on
and the center of gravity distance of the load from the hub face. the peak velocity of the individual actuator. The solution is
Please refer to the supplied formulas to determine each of the given in radians/sec2
allowable conditions. UNIT SIZE αd = Deceleration (rad/sec2)
RIxxx25 ω2/1.032
STEP 12 RISxx32 ω2/2.571
Determine Allowable Attached Load Weight (Lf) RIDxx32 ω2/2.229
The next step in determining the proper Series RIx RISxx50 ω2/1.920
actuator size is to determine the bearing capacity of the RIDxx50 ω2/2.330
unit according to your application requirements. STEP 16
Calculate Stopping Torque (Td)
STEP 13 This is the kinetic energy used to stop a rotary load to your
Calculate Maximum Actuator Radial Loading (Lm) application conditions. This formula is one of the components
This formula calculates the maximum radial loading allowed for required when comparing reaction forces on the bearing. Using
the Series RI actuator based on 5,000,000 cycles and the axial the identical illustrations and formulas on pages 3D-21 and 3D-22
load (La) that you are placing on the bearings. Note: Center of used when calculating the required starting torque, replace the
Gravity distance is different depending on if the unit is acceleration value with the deceleration value. This is the
horizontal or vertical. In horizontal applications, (Cg) is the reaction torque required to stop the load. PHD recommends a
distance from the mounting face of the hub to the (Cg) of the safety factor of 1 to 1.25.
load. In vertical applications, (Cg) is the distance from the
centerline of the hub to (Cg) of the load. Stopping Torque (in/lb) = TA, TAg
Balanced Load TA = Jm x αd x SF
La = Axial Load Weight (lb) Unbalanced Load TAg = [(Jm x αd) + (Fg x k)] x SF
Cg
Horizontal Orientation (in) STEP 17
(Cg) = Distance from Face of Hub to Calculate Radial Bearing Load At Stopping (LS)
Center of Gravity of Load This formula converts the sum torque’s of the propelling torque
and stopping torque into the reaction force on the two
Vertical Orientation (in) Cg bearings.
(Cg) = Distance from Centerline of Hub
to Center of Gravity of Load UNIT Radial Bearing Load at Stopping (LS)
SIZE lb N
RIxxx25 (Tp + Td)/.96875 (Tp + Td)/.0246
Max Actuator Radial Loading (Lm) RIxxx32 (Tp + Td)/1.1667 (Tp + Td)/.0296
RIxxx50 (Tp + Td)/1.5625 (Tp + Td)/.0399
UNIT
SIZE IMPERIAL METRIC
-1.4175 (La) + 1106.86 -36.0024 (La) + 125042.4 STEP 18
RIxxx25 Lm = Lm = Calculate Max. Fixed Radial Load (Lf)
1.933 + Cg 49.1 + Cg
-46.0702 (La) + 340706.2 This formula will produce the maximum radial load weight that
RIxxx32 Lm = -1.8138 (La) + 3015.57 Lm = can be safely attached to the rotary actuator, given the axial
2.5 + Cg 63.5 + Cg
load weight and (Cg) distance of your application.
RIxxx50 Lm = -2.699 (La) + 6573.92 Lm = -68.5696 (La) + 742656
3.553 + Cg 90.25 + Cg
Max Fixed Radial Load (Lf) = Lm - Ls
STEP 14
Calculate Propelling Torque (Tp) STEP 19
This formula is one of the components required when Compare (Lf) to Actual Load Affixed to Actuator (Lr)
comparing reaction Compare the (Lf) value to the weight of the attached load. If the
forces on the UNIT Propelling Torque (Tp) attached load is less than the (Lf) value, the actuator is correct
bearing. You may SIZE in-lb Nm for your application. If the attached load is greater than the (Lf)
use the formula or RISxx25 .369 x psi .6047 x bar value, go to the next size actuator and rerun the above
simply look up the RIDxx25 .737 x psi 1.2077 x bar calculations until the (Lf) value is greater than the attached
torque produced by RISxx32 .727 x psi 1.1913 x bar load weight.
the rotary actuator at RIDxx32 1.454 x psi 2.3827 x bar
a specified pressure. RISxx50 2.378 x psi 3.8969 x bar Lr = Weight of Attached Load
3D-21
IMPERIAL UNITS:
SF = Safety Factor
METRIC UNITS:
BALANCED LOADS
T = Jm x α x SF
3D
L
k
k k
2
Jm = Fg x k 2 Fg
2
Fg 1
g 2 Jm =
g
x
4
x ( L3 + k ) 2
Jm =
5
x
g
x k2

k dim is
radius
b of rod
(with gravity)
a a
2 2 2 2
(without gravity)

T = Jm x α x SF 2
T = Jm x α x SF
Mounted off center Mounted off center
Fg2 k dim is Fg2

radius
8
c
of rod
4
7
b
b
k
Fg a Fg1 a Fg1
Fg 2 2
Fg2 (4b2 + 3k2)
(Fg
2 2 2 2
Jm =
g
x k2 Jm = Fg1 x 4a + c + Fg2 x 4b + c
g 12 g 12
Jm =
g1
x (4a + 3k ) +
12 g
x)( 12
)
3D-22
SIZING EXAMPLE: SERIES RI ROTARY ACTUATOR
APPLICATION INFORMATION - EXAMPLE 1
Weight = 32.2 lb
Rotation Angle = 180°
Pressure = 87 psi
Orientation = Horizontal k
Center of Gravity Distance = 2" 4.00
Desired Cycle Rate = .75 sec k
Safety Factor: Acceleration = 2
Deceleration = 1 6Ø
Axial Load = Ø
Radial Load (Lr) = 32.2 lb
Cycles per Minute = 40
EXAMPLE 1
STEP 8 Calculate Propelling Energy (Pe)
Determine Required Starting Torque for Application
RISx25 = .1902 x psi
STEP 1 Determine (Jm) Pe = .1902 x 87 = 16.55 in-lb
Fg k2 32.2 32
Jm = x = x STEP 9 Calculate Total Energy (Et)
g 2 386.4 2
Jm = .0833 x 4.5 = .375 in-lb-sec 2 Et = Ke + P e
Et = 21.87 + 16.55 = 38.42 in-lb
STEP 2 Determine (αA)
Angle Rotation STEP 10 Compare Maximum Total Energy (Em) to Total Energy (Et)
in Degrees and Acceptable Motion Energy to Total Energy
αA = .035
Time of Rotation Em ≥ E t 75 ≥ 38.42
in Seconds2
180 Ea ≥ Et 64.4 ≥ 38.42
αA = .035 = 11.2 rad/sec2
(.75)2
SHOCKS WILL PERFORM AS DESIRED
STEP 3 Starting Torque
T = Jm x αA x SF STEP 11 Calculate Energy per Hour (Eh)
T = .375 x 11.2 x 2 = 8.4 in-lb Cycles/Hr = Cycles/min x 60
RISxx25 WILL PRODUCE SUFFICIENT TORQUE Cycles/Hr = 40 x 60 = 2400
Check for Stopping Capacity Eh = 2400 x 38.42 in-lb = 92,208 in-lb/hr
300,000 ≥ 92,208
STEP 4 Calculate Peak Velocity (ω)
RISxx25
STEP 12 Calculate Allowable Attached Load Weight
ω = .045 x Average Velocity (refer to chart pg. 19)
Axial Load from Application = La
180
ω = .045 x = 10.8 rad/sec
.75 La = Ø
STEP 5 Compare to Graph (refer to pg.3D-19)
STEP 13 Calculate Max Actuator Radial Loading (Lm)
SHOCK PAD WILL NOT PERFORM AS DESIRED
Determine Cg Distance = 2"
This velocity is greater than the shock
pad allows, go to the section labeled -1.4175 (La) + 1106.86
Lm =
“Sizing an RIx Unit with Shocks” 1.933 + Cg
Lm = 281.43 lb
STEP 6 Compare Peak Velocity to Allowable Impact Velocity for
a given (Jm) Load using Shock Absorbers STEP 14 Calculate Propelling Torque (Tp)
Compare to graph on page 3D-20.
Tp = .369 x psi
RISx is acceptable for this application.
Tp = .369 x 87 psi = 32.103 in-lb
STEP 7 Calculate Kinetic Energy (Ke) STEP 15 Calculate Deceleration (αd)
Ke = 1/2 x Jm x ω2 αd = ω2/1.032
Ke = 1/2 x (.375) x (10.8)2 = 21.87 in-lb αd = (10.8)2/1.032
αd = 113.0 rad/sec2
3D-23
EXAMPLE 1 CONT.
STEP 16 Calculate Stopping Torque (Td) (from STEP 7 STEP 18 Calculate Max Fix Radial Load (Lf)
pg. 3D-20) Lf = L m - L s
Td = Jm x αd x SF
Lf = 281.43 - 76.88
Td = .375 x 113.0 x 1 = 42.375
Lf = 204.54
Td = 42.375
STEP 19 Compare Max Fix Radial Load (Lf) to Actual Load Affixed to
STEP 17 Calculate Radial Bearing Load at Stopping (Ls) Actuator (Lr)
Lf ≥ L r
(from chart pg. 3D-21)
204.54 ≥ 32.2 lb
Ls = (Tp + Td)/.96875 RISxx25 FITS THIS APPLICATION
Ls = (32.103 + 42.38)/.96875
Ls = 76.88 lb

gripper
Weight = 15 lb mounting plate & two - 8 lb grippers
3D
24"
Pressure = 65 psi 4"
Orientation = Vertical
Center of Gravity Distance = 10"
Desired Cycle Rate = 1.25 sec 10"
Safety Factor: Acceleration = 2 Deceleration = 1
Cycles per Minute = 20 cyc/min = 1200 cyc/hr
Axial Load (La) = 31 lb gripper
Radial Load (Lr) = Ø mounting
plate
EXAMPLE 2
Check for Stopping Capacity
Determine Required Starting Torque for Application
STEP 4 Calculate Peak Velocity (ω)
STEP 1 Determine (Jm)
for Mounting Plate RIDxx32
ω = .028 x Average Velocity
Fg a2 + b2 ω = .028 x
180
= 4.032 rad/sec
Jm = g x
12 1.25
15 (24)2 + (4)2 STEP 5 Compare Peak Velocity to Allowable Impact Graph
Jm = x
386.4 12 (pg. 3D-19)
Jm = .0388198 x 49.333 This velocity is in the range of shock pads
but not with the attached load Jm of 6.055
Jm = 1.9151 in-lb-sec2 it is closer to handling .25 in-lbs2, go to
“Sizing an RIxx Unit with Shocks”
Jm for 2 Point Loads (Gripper)
Fg STEP 6 Compare Peak Velocity to Allowable Impact Velocity for
Jm = g
x k2 a given (Jm) Load using Shock Absorbers
8 Compare to graph on page 20.
x 102 = 2.0704 in-lb-sec2
386.4 RIDxx32 is acceptable for this application.
Total Jm = 1.9151 + 2(2.0704)
Jm = 6.056 in-lb-sec2 STEP 7 Calculate Kinetic Energy (Ke)
STEP 2 Determine (αA)
Ke = 1/2 x Jm x ω2
180 Ke = 1/2 (6.056) x (4.032)2 = 49.225 in-lb
αA = .035 = 4.032 rad/sec2
(1.25)2
STEP 3 Starting Torque
TA = Jm x αA x SF
TA = 6.056 x 4.032 x 2
TA = 48.836 in-lb
RIDxx32 WILL PRODUCE SUFFICIENT TORQUE
3D-24
EXAMPLE 2 CONT.
STEP 8 Calculate Propelling Energy (Pe) STEP 14 Calculate Propelling Torque (Tp) (refer to chart
RIDx32 = 1.621 x psi pg. 3D-20)
RIDx32 =
Pe = 1.621 x (65 psi) = 105.37 in-lb
Tp = 1.454 x psi
STEP 9 Calculate Total Energy (Et) Tp = 1.454 x 65 psi = 94.51 in-lb
Et = Ke + Pe
STEP 15 Calculate Deceleration (αd)
Et = 49.225 + 105.37 = 154.6 in-lb
αd = ω2/2.229
STEP 10 Compare Maximum Total Energy (Em) to Total Energy (Et) αd = (4.032)2/2.229
Em ≥ Et 225 ≥ 154.6 αd = 7.29 rad/sec2
Ea ≥ Et 225 ≥ 154.6
STEP 16 Calculate Stopping Torque (Td) (from STEP 7
SHOCK WILL PERFORM AS DESIRED pg. 3D-20)
Td = 6.056 x 7.29 x 1
STEP 11 Calculate Energy per Hour (Eh)
Td = 44.15 in-lb
Cycles/Hr = Cycles/min x 60
STEP 17 Calculate Radial Bearing Load at Stopping (Ls) (refer to
Cycles/Hr = 40 x 60 = 2400
chart pg. 3D-21)
Eh = 2400 x 154.6 in-lb = 371,040 in-lb/Hr
Ls = (Tp + Td)/1.1667
371,040 ≤ 400,000
Ls = 138.7/1.1667
STEP 12 Calculate Allowable Attached Load Weight Ls = 118.8 lb

Axial Load Weight = 31 lb = (La)
STEP 18 Calculate Max Fix Radial Load (Lf)
STEP 13 Calculate Max Actuator Radial Loading (Lm) Lf = Lm - Ls
Determine Cg Distance = 10" Lf = 236.75 - 118.8
-1.8138 (La) + 3015.57 Lf = 117.95 lb

Lm =
2.5 + Cg
STEP 19 Compare Max Fix Radial Load (Lf) to Actual Load Affixed t
-1.8138 (31) + 3015.57 to Actuator (Lr)
Lm = = 236.75 lb
2.5 + 10
Lf ≥ Lr
117.95 lb ≥ 31 lb
RIDxx32 FITS THIS APPLICATION
3D-25
APPLICATION EXAMPLE: SERIES RI ROTARY ACTUATOR
LATHE LOADER
In this application, a combination of a slide, 2 grippers, and a
rotary actuator load and unload parts from a lathe. One Series 190
Gripper grasps a blank part on a holding rack while another Series
190 Gripper grasps a finished part in the lathe. A Series SK Slide
extends out, and the finished part is removed from the lathe while
the blank part is removed from the holding rack. A Series RI Rotary
Actuator then rotates clockwise. The slide retracts, the blank part is
loaded into the lathe, and the finished part is released into a holding
bin. The Series RI Rotary Actuator is beneficial for this application
because of its integral airlines. This feature eliminates any external
airlines, which could wear or sever causing catastrophic damage.
3D
CAM SHAFT FINISHING PROCESS

In this application, two grippers are combined with a Series RI
Rotary Actuator to load and unload cam shafts into a grinding
machine for finishing. First a Series SK Slide, mounted to a gantry,
will provide the reaching motion as a Series 5300 Gripper picks up
the unfinished cam shaft. The Series RI Rotary Actuator rotates the
grasped cam to the top position. The gantry then cycles back to the
grinding machine, the second gripper is extended down into the
machine to pick up the finished cam shaft, the slide retracts, the
rotary actuator rotates the grippers and shafts, and the unfinished
cam is loaded into the machine. Finally the finished cam shaft is
moved and placed in a completion tray on a conveyor. The Series RI
Rotary Actuator is ideal for this application due to the integral air
lines which eliminate the flexing and twisting of external lines. If
crimped, cut, or pulled loose it could result in the dropping of the
part into a valuable grinding machine.
3D-26
INDEX:
Page 3D-28
SERIES RF
NEW!
Benefits
Page 3D-29
Dimensions
Pages 3D-30 and 3D-31
Low Profile Design Provides High Torque
Engineering Data
Page 3D-32
Options
Accessories
Rotary Actuator
Selection
Sizing Example
3D-27
INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION CAT-03 www.phdinc.com/rf
3D
3D-28
TO ORDER SPECIFY:
Product, Series, Type, Design No., BORE
Bore Size, Rotation, and Options. SIZE ROTATION SPEED CONTROL VALVE
14 mm PB - Rotational Speed Controls both directions
PRODUCT TYPE 20 mm PC - Rotational Speed Controls counterclockwise OPTIONS
R - Rotary S - Pneumatic 25 mm PW - Rotational Speed Controls clockwise Q19 - Hollow Pinion
(800) 624-8511
www.phdinc.com/rf
R F S 1 25 x 180 - PB - AB - Q19
SERIES DESIGN NO. ROTATION ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
F - Low Profile 1 - Imperial 180° (Standard)
5 - Metric AB - Angle adjustment with shock pad
installed both ends
NOTE: This option must be ordered with the unit.
1) Switches and switch kits must be ordered separately.
ROTATION SPEED CONTROL REPLACEMENT KITS
CAT-03
UNIT IMPERIAL NO. METRIC NO. SERIES 5580 HALL EFFECT SWITCHES
RFSx14 PART NO. DESCRIPTION
68946-01 68947-01
RFSx20
55803-1-02 NPN 4.5 - 24 VDC with 2 meter cable
RFSx25 68946-03 68947-03
55804-1-02 PNP 4.5 - 24 VDC with 2 meter cable
NOTE: One Rotational Speed Control fitting per kit. 55823-1 NPN 4.5 - 24 VDC with Quick Connect
55824-1 PNP 4.5 - 24 VDC with Quick Connect PRO
PROXIMITY SWITCH KITS M D
O
T
U
UNIT KIT NO. SERIES 5580 REED SWITCHES

CT

CUS
S
RFSx14 69700
RFSx20 69700 55802-1-02 NPN or PNP 4.5 - 24 VDC with 2 meter cable
F
RFSx25 69702 55822-1 NPN or PNP 4.5 - 24 VDC with Quick Connect IT D
TO E
NE
CORDSETS WITH QUICK CONNECT 6mm SQUARE INDUCTIVE PROXIMITY SWITCHES
ORDERING DATA: SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATOR
PART NO. LENGTH PART NO. DESCRIPTION CUSTOM ROTARY ACTUATORS

17533-00-02 2 meter cable 18431-001-02 NPN 10 - 30 VDC with 2 meter cable ARE AVAILABLE. PLEASE CONSULT PHD.
17533-00-05 5 meter cable 18431-002-02 PNP 10 - 30 VDC with 2 meter cable
Options may affect unit length.

See unit dimension and options
SOLUTIONS FOR
! pages for adders.
BENEFITS: SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATOR
BENEFITS
■ Series RF Rotary Actuators feature a low profile body design
with a large output mounting hub to cover a wide range of
applications.
■ Available in three sizes with a standard rotation of 180° and
torque ranging from 7 to 67 in-lb at 100 psi [0.8 to 7.7 Nm
at 7 bar].
■ The Series RF rack and pinion design features high tensile
steel racks and a one-piece pinion/output hub providing
durability and long life.
■ Zero backlash at ends of rotation for precise rotary positioning.
■ Appropriate PHD Series SHP Slides and Series GRT Grippers
bolt directly to the Series RF output hub.
■ All units feature built-in standard angle adjustments and are
infinitely adjustable from 0 - 180° of rotation.
■ Standard internal urethane shock pads provide quiet operation
and end of stroke deceleration with precise repeatability
provided by a hard stop .
■ Standard through mounting holes in the body are threaded to ■ Optional switch kits allow the use of either PHD Series 5580
provide versatility and ease of mounting of the actuator. switches or Series 18431 6 mm square inductive proximity
■ Available in imperial and metric versions for flexibility of switches for easy interfacing to electrical controls.
design for a world market. ■ Optional port flow controls provide accurate control of
rotation speed.
Direct Mounting for One Piece Pinion Switch Slot
PHD Series GRT and Output Hub Sealed
Grippers and Series Radial Bearing Switch Target Groove
SHP Slides
One Piece Piston and Rack

Double Rack
Angle Adjustment with
and Pinion Drive
Integral Shock Pad
(as Standard)
SPECIFICATIONS SERIES RF
PISTON SEALS Block Vee
PISTON One Piece with Rack
PINION SHAFTS One Piece Alloy Steel with Integral Output Hub
RACKS Alloy Steel
END CAPS Clear Anodized Aluminum THEORETICAL TORQUE
BODY Hard Coated Aluminum
UNIT SIZE in-lb/psi [Nm/bar]
BEARINGS Radial Ball Bearing
PORTS NPT [BSPP] RFSx14 .07 [.11]
BREAKAWAY PRESSURE Under 15 psi [1 bar] RFSx20 .24 [.40]
RFSx25 .67 [1.09]
WORKING PRESSURE 100 psi [7 bar] Maximum
STANDARD ROTATIONS Fully Adjustable (0 to 180°)
BACKLASH No Backlash at End of Rotation
LIFE Designed for 5 Million Trouble-Free Cycles
OPERATING TEMPERATURE -20° to 160°F [-28.9° to 71.1°C]
3D-29
DIMENSIONS: SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATOR, SIZE 14 & 20
F 6 J
2X E
2X Ø V ±.0005
[±.013] SEE NOTE 1
2X Ø AA ±.0005 [±.013]
THRU ON W BOLT
Y HOLE CIRCLE
A ØD B
W
2X T THD THRU 2X S 3X Z THREAD THRU
C’BORE OPPOSITE ON W BOLT HOLE CIRCLE
2X G
SIDE FOR U SHCS
2X CC THREAD THRU
H ON Y BOLT HOLE
R 2X BB
5 2X DD CIRCLE
3D
1
K
L
2X P PORT
4 M
2
C
NOTES: 3
1) THRU HOLES IN THE HUB ARE CLEARANCE FOR
SHCS MOUNTING OF THE UNIT FROM THE HUB SIDE
2) NUMBERS IN CIRCLES INDICATE PORT POSITION
3) OUTPUT HUB SHOWN AT MID-POSITION

RFS114 1.713 2.501 .977 2.244 .546 1.059 .394 .669 1.417 .473 .197 .303 .606 10-32 1.772 .236 1/4-20
RFS514 [43.5] [63.5] [24.8] [57.0] [13.9] [26.9] [10.0] [17.0] [36.0] [12.0] [5.0] [7.7] [15.4] [M5 x 0.8] [45.0] [6.0] [M6 x 1.0]
RFS120 2.598 3.700 1.320 3.386 .979 1.418 .551 .925 2.126 .610 .374 .433 .780 10-32 2.756 .315 1/4-20
RFS520 [66.0] [94.0] [33.5] [86.0] [24.9] [36.0] [14.0] [23.5] [54.0] [15.5] [9.5] [11.0] [19.8] [M5 x 0.8] [70.0] [8.0] [M6 x 1.0]

SIZE U V W Y Z AA BB CC DD
RFS114 #8 .1283 1.4940 1.7080 5-40 .1283 60° 5-40 26°
RFS514 [M4] [3.08] [37.9] [43.4] [M3 x 0.5] [3.08] [60°] [M3 x 0.5] [26°]
RFS120 #8 .1908 2.106 2.0960 8-32 .1283 60° 5-40 26°
RFS520 [M4] [4.09] [53.5] [53.2] [M4 x 0.7] [4.09] [60°] [M3 x 0.5] [26°]

www.phdinc.com/rf CAT-03 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
DIMENSIONS: SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATOR, SIZE 25
F 6 J
2X E
2X Ø V ±.0005 3X Z THREAD THRU
[±.013] SEE NOTE 1 ON W BOLT
HOLE CIRCLE
4X THRU &
C’BORE OPPOSITE 2X Ø AA ±.0005 [±.013]
SIDE FOR U SHCS Y THRU ON W BOLT
HOLE CIRCLE
2X S 3X FF A Ø D B
4X T THD
x EE DP W
2X G
2X CC THEAD THRU
ON Y BOLT HOLE CIRCLE
H 2X BB
R
5 2X DD
1
K
2X P PORT L
4 M
2
C
3
NOTES:
1) THRU HOLES IN THE HUB ARE CLEARANCE FOR
SHCS MOUNTING OF THE UNIT FROM THE HUB SIDE
2) NUMBERS IN CIRCLES INDICATE PORT POSITION
3) OUTPUT HUB SHOWN AT MID-POSITION

RFS125 4.252 5.826 1.728 3.622 1.137 1.870 .787 1.220 2.953 .787 .472 .630 1.260 1/8 NPT 2.500 1.575 1/4-20
RFS525 [108.0] [148.0] [43.9] [92.0] [28.9] [47.5] [20.0] [31.0] [75.0] [20.0] [12.0] [16.0] [32.0] [1/8 BSPP] [63.5] [40.0] [M6 x 1.0]

SIZE U V W Y Z AA BB CC DD EE FF
RFS125 #10 .2533 3.110 2.926 1/4-20 .2533 60° 6-32 20° .433 2.500
RFS525 [M5] [6.43] [79.0] [74.3] [M6 x 1.0] [5.09] [60°] [M4 x 0.7] [20°] [11.0] [63.5]

ENGINEERING DATA: SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATOR
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE AT 87 psi [6 bar] PISTON DIAMETER PISTON AREA AIR VOLUME (2 x 180)
UNIT SIZE in-lb Nm in mm in2 cm2 in3 cc
14 6.05 0.7 0.551 14 0.239 1.54 0.44 7.17
20 21.18 2.4 0.787 20 0.487 3.14 1.53 25.07
25 57.92 6.5 0.984 25 0.761 4.91 4.18 68.55
PRESSURE AND BREAKAWAY RATINGS

All Series RF Rotary Actuators have a maximum pressure ANGLE OF ROTATION
rating of 100 psi [7 bar] with a 15 psi [1 bar] breakaway pressure. Standard angle of rotation is 180°. Consult PHD for rotation
They are for pneumatic application only. requirements above 180°. All units are supplied with angle
adjustment which provides 90° adjustment from each end.
OPERATING TEMPERATURES
Standard Series RF Rotary Actuators are recommended for use ROTATIONAL ALLOWANCE
in temperatures from -20° to +160°F [-28.9° to +71.1°C]. If a PHD The rotational tolerance of the Series RF Rotary Actuator is +0°
supplied external rotation speed control valve is used, the to +3° on the nominal specified rotation.
3D
temperature range is from 5° to 160°F [-15° to 71°C]. Consult PHD

for temperatures beyond this range. ROTATION RATES
The speeds given in the chart below reflect one cycle of 180°
LUBRICATION with no load applied at 80 psi [5.5 bar]. Times given are average and
All units are permanently lubricated at assembly for service include the deceleration time through to stopping.
of the rack and pinion using high grade bearing grease and by using ROTATION SPEED CONTROLS
lubricated air.
Control of output hub speed is extremely important as kinetic
energy generated by a rotating load is a function of rotational speed
BACKLASH and distance from the load to output hub center. Flow controls
All units have 0° of backlash at ends of rotation. For backlash should be considered to set speed so that the energy is within the
at mid-rotation see chart below. limit of the unit. See page 3D-33 for information on Series RF
Rotary Actuator controls. See pages 3D-37 through 3D-40 for
BACKLASH AT MID-ROTATION information on load stopping capacity.
UNIT SIZE ± Degrees
14 2.80
20 1.38
25 0.82
BEARING LOADS TABLE WEIGHT TABLE

MAXIMUM MAXIMUM RADIAL MAXIMUM COMBINED UNIT ACTUATOR WEIGHT
AXIAL PAYLOAD AT RADIAL AND AXIAL SIZE lb kg
UNIT PAYLOAD MOUNTING SURFACE PAYLOAD 14 0.62 .28
SIZE lb N lb N lb N 20 1.88 .85
14 1.96 8.72 2.35 10.45 1.33 5.92 25 3.43 1.56
20 3.79 16.86 4.55 20.24 2.59 11.52
25 6.33 28.16 7.60 33.81 4.32 19.22 MAXIMUM
THEORETICAL TORQUE OUTPUT ROTATION RATE TABLE
ROTATION RATES @ 80 PSI
INPUT UNIT SIZE UNIT (SECONDS)
PRESSURE RFSx14 RFSx20 RFSx25 SIZE 90° 180°
psi bar in-lb Nm in-lb Nm in-lb Nm 14 0.24 0.35
40 2.7 2.8 0.31 9.7 1.10 26.6 3.01 20 0.26 0.43
50 3.4 3.5 0.39 12.2 1.38 33.3 3.76 25 0.23 0.37
60 4.1 4.2 0.47 14.6 1.65 39.9 4.51
70 4.8 4.9 0.55 17.0 1.93 46.6 5.27
80 5.5 5.6 0.63 19.5 2.20 53.3 6.02
90 6.2 6.3 0.71 21.9 2.48 59.9 6.77
100 6.8 7.0 0.79 24.3 2.75 66.6 7.52
3D-32
OPTIONS: SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATOR
PB BOTH DIRECTIONS UNIT LETTER DIMENSION
SIZE A B C D E ØF M N
The PHD Series RF Rotary Actuators offer optional external RFS114 .984 .827 .015 .035 .394 .156 .303 .606
compact flow control fittings for adjusting output hub rotation RFS514 [25.0] [21.0] [0.4] [0.9] [10.0] [4.0] [7.7] [15.4]
RFS120 .984 1.043 .136 .156 .394 .156 .433 .780
speed. The speed of the hub is controlled by regulating the cylinder RFS520 [25.0] [26.5] [3.5] [4.0] [10.0] [4.0] [11.0] [19.8]
exhaust. The control fittings are unidirectional flow control valves RFS125 1.614 1.043 .089 .109 .650 .250 .630 1.26
where intake air flows freely through the flow control and exhaust is RFS525 [41.0] [26.5] [2.3] [2.8] [16.5] [6.4] [16.0] [32.0]
metered out through an adjustment screw. Intake capacity is slightly METRIC INFORMATION SHOWN IN [ ].
greater than the full open exhaust capacity, enabling maximum
variation of hub rotation speed.
The PHD Series RF flow control fittings are mounted directly to
Ø F TUBE SIZE
the caps and provide an integral tube fitting connection. They also
swivel 360° around the ports, providing easy installation of tubing.
Rotational velocities are adjusted and maintained by the captivated
E SQ
fine adjustment screw with a locking nut to ensure precise velocity
control and repeatability in output hub rotation speed.
NOTE: Flow control fitting is effective between 15 to 100 psi

[1.0 to 7.0 bar] and from 5° to 160°F [-15° to 71.1°C].
A
B
D
REPLACEMENT KIT NO.
UNIT SIZE IMPERIAL METRIC
RFSx14 and RFSx20 68946-01 68947-01 C
RFSx25 68946-03 68947-03
1 KIT REQUIRED PER END OF ADJUSTMENT DESIRED
NOTE: ONE PORT CONTROL FITTING PER KIT M

OPTIONS: SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATOR
ANGLE ADJUSTMENTS WITH
AB SHOCK PAD INSTALLED BOTH ENDS
(STANDARD)
The angle adjustment screw has a standard shock pad See pages 3D-37 through 3D-40 for details on the stopping
providing energy dissipation, accurate mechanical repeatability, and capacity of the installed angle adjustment with shock pad. Reference
quiet actuator operation at end of rotation. the Angle Adjust Specifications Chart for nominal effective angle of
The standard rotation for Series RF is 180 degrees. The rotation in each direction.
mechanical stop provides an adjustment range of 90 degrees from The angle adjustment is factory installed and must remain
each end of rotation. The ability to adjust over this wide range installed prior to operation. Operation of units without an angle
eliminates the need to order special units with specific angles of adjustment can damage the units and void any and all warranties.
rotation. Only the PHD angle adjustment with integral shock pad should be
used in Series RF Rotary Actuators. The use of any other angle
adjustment screw will affect the actuator performance and life
expectancy.
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT SPECIFICATIONS

3D
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT THREAD DECELERATION KINETIC ENERGY WRENCH DECELERATION

UNIT REPLACEMENT TYPE STROKE WEIGHT LOAD LENGTH HEX SIZE EFFECTIVE
SIZE KIT NO. mm in mm lb kg in-lb Nm in mm mm ANGLE
14 69713 M6 x 1.0 0.012 0.30 0.01 0.005 0.041 0.0046 0.96 24 3 5°
20 69714 M8 x 1.25 0.022 0.56 0.03 0.014 0.145 0.0164 1.56 40 4 5°
25 69715 M12 x 1.75 0.036 0.91 0.07 0.032 0.395 0.0446 1.97 50 6 5°
Angle Adjustment Replacement Kits Include:
(1) Angle adjustment screw with integral shock pad, (1) Nut, (1)
Thread Seal
1 Kit is required per end of adjustment desired
OUTPUT HUB WITH LETTER DIMENSION

Q19 HOLLOW PINION UNIT SIZE
RFS120
ØA
10-32
Ø KK
.176
Ø LL
.295
MM
.039
(sizes 20 & 25 only) RFS520 [5 x 0.8] [4.5] [7.5] [1.0]
This option provides a hole through the standard output hub RFS125 1/8 NPT .339 .433 .039
and pinion shaft for feeding pneumatic or electrical lines from the RFS525 [1/8 BSPP] [8.6] [11.0] [1.0]
back of the rotary actuator to the output hub. The hub has the same METRIC INFORMATION SHOWN IN [ ].
mounting as the standard unit. A port is provided on the bottom of
the pinion shaft and an o-ring interface on the face of the
output hub.
C C
Ø KK
MM Ø LL
HOLLOW PINION O-RING KIT
UNIT SIZE KIT NO.
14 —
20 3642-059-1
25 3642-064-1
A PORT THREAD
SECTION C-C

ACCESSORIES: SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATOR
PROXIMITY SWITCH KIT
This accessory provides for the mounting of a 6 mm square,
PHD Series 5580 solid state switch, or PHD 18431 inductive PROXIMITY SWITCH KITS
proximity switch. One switch mounting kit is required per switch,
REQUIRED REQUIRED
with the typical application requiring two kits. The kit includes a SWITCH TORQUE SWITCH TARGET TORQUE TARGET
switch target as well as the required mounting hardware. UNIT FASTENER FASTENER FASTENER FASTENER
The Series RF body accepts two proximity switches, which are SIZE KIT NO. SIZE in-lb Nm SIZE in-lb Nm
easily mounted on the actuator using the switch slots in the sides of 14 69700 M3 x 0.5 x 4 5 0.6 M4 x 0.7 5 0.6
the body. 20 69700 M3 x 0.5 x 4 5 0.6 M4 x 0.7 5 0.6
The switch targets mount in the groove around the output hub 25 69702 M3 x 0.5 x 14 10 1.1 M4 x 0.7 5 0.6
OD. The switch target has a magnet on one side for use with the
EACH SWITCH KIT CONTAINS THE FOLLOWING:
Series 5580 switch and is to be installed with the magnet toward the 1 - TARGET ASSEMBLY W/MAGNET
switch face. If the Series 18431 switch is used, the magnet should 1 - TARGET FASTENER
be installed away from the switch face. 1 - SWITCH FASTENER
RFSx25 UNIT KITS ALSO INCLUDE:
Proximity switches are ordered separately, see PHD's main 1 - SWITCH BRACKET
catalog for complete switch specifications.
SERIES 5580 HALL EFFECT SWITCHES
SWITCH SPECIFICATIONS
SERIES 5580 HALL EFFECT SWITCH NPN 4.5 - 24 VDC with 2 meter cable
55803-1-02
UNIT REPEATABILITY HYSTERESIS BAND WIDTH 55804-1-02 PNP 4.5 - 24 VDC with 2 meter cable
SIZE (DEGREES) (DEGREES) MAX (DEG) MIN (DEG) 55823-1 NPN 4.5 - 24 VDC with Quick Connect
14 ± .09 ± .26 27 14 55824-1 PNP 4.5 - 24 VDC with Quick Connect
20 ± .10 ± .28 14 9 SERIES 5580 REED SWITCHES
25 ± .11 ± .35 11 8
SERIES 5580 REED SWITCH 55802-1-02 NPN or PNP 4.5 - 24 VDC with 2 meter cable
UNIT REPEATABILITY HYSTERESIS BAND WIDTH 55822-1 NPN or PNP 4.5 - 24 VDC with Quick Connect
SIZE (DEGREES) (DEGREES) MAX (DEG) MIN (DEG)
14 ± .18 ± .53 31 20 6 mm SQUARE INDUCTIVE PROXIMITY SWITCHES
20 ± .19 ± .63 31 14 PART NO. DESCRIPTION
25 ± .74 ± .63 16 12
18431-001-02 NPN 10 - 30 VDC with 2 meter cable
SERIES 18431 6 mm SQUARE INDUCTIVE SWITCH 18431-002-02 PNP 10 - 30 VDC with 2 meter cable
UNIT REPEATABILITY HYSTERESIS BAND WIDTH
SIZE (DEGREES) (DEGREES) MAX (DEG) MIN (DEG) CORDSETS WITH QUICK CONNECT
14 ± .35 ± .79 36 27 PART NO. LENGTH
20 ± .36 ± .72 32 18 17533-00-02 2 meter cable
25 ± .14 ± .67 14 9 17533-00-05 5 meter cable
SERIES RFSx14 & 20 SERIES RFSx25 SWITCH

(SOLD SEPARATELY)
SWITCH KIT
(1 KIT PER ROTATION)
SWITCH KIT
(1 KIT PER ROTATION)
TARGET FASTENER
SWITCH SLOT SWITCH FASTENER

(ONE EACH SIDE) TARGET FASTENER
SWITCH SLOT
SWITCH (ONE EACH SIDE)
(SOLD SEPARATELY) SWITCH FASTENER

SIZE A B C D
.213 — .457 —
RFSx14
[5.4] — [11.6] —
.531 — .720 —
RFSx20
[13.5] — [18.3] — D
.732 .788 1.913 1.902
A RFSx25
[18.6] [20.0] [48.6] [48.3]
METRIC INFORMATION SHOWN IN [ ]. A
C
B C

ACCESSORIES: SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATOR
GRT MOUNTING KIT
The PHD Series RF Rotary Actuator features a mounting hole
pattern that directly connects specific sizes of the PHD Series GRT TRANSITION PLATE
MOUNTING KIT
Gripper to the hub. This mounting kit provides the necessary
mounting hardware for mounting a Series GRT Gripper onto a
SERIES SHP
Series RF Rotary Actuator. MOUNTING KIT
SHP MOUNTING KIT

The PHD Series RF Rotary Actuator features a mounting hole SERIES GRT
pattern that directly connects specific sizes of the PHD Series SHP MOUNTING KIT
Slides to the hub. This mounting kit provides the necessary
mounting hardware for mounting a Series SHP Slides to a Series RF
Rotary Actuator.
SHP SLIDE
BLANK TRANSITION PLATE BLANK
MOUNTING KIT TRANSITION PLATE
This accessory provides for the mounting of devices other than
GRT GRIPPER
3D
PHD Series GRT Grippers and Series SHP Slides to the Series RF
Rotary Actuator. The kit includes an anodized, 6061-T6 aluminum,
transition plate, pre-drilled to mount to the rotary actuator hub,
along with the associated mounting hardware. The mounting holes
for the secondary unit are to be machined by the customer.
Ø C (SLIDE RETACTED) SERIES RF

ØC ROTARY ACTUATOR
(GRIPPER OPEN )
GRT MOUNTING KIT

SERIES GRT REQUIRED
UNIT GRIPPER FASTENER TORQUE
SIZE KIT NO. UNIT SIZE SIZE in-lb Nm
RFS114 69726 GRT112 5-40 x 1 20 [2.3]
RFS514 69741 GRT512 [ M3 x 0.5 x 25 ] 20 [2.3]
RFS120 69727 GRT122 8-32 x 1 1/8 40 [4.5]
(A) RFS520 69742 GRT522 [ M4 x 0.7 x 30 ] 40 [4.5]
(A)
RFS125 69728 GRT142 1/4-20 x 1 5/8 140 [15.8]
RFS525 69743 GRT542 [ M6 x 1.0 x 40 ] 140 [15.8]
B
SHP MOUNTING KIT
GRT DIMENSIONS SHP DIMENSIONS SERIES SHP REQUIRED
UNIT LETTER DIMENSION UNIT LETTER DIMENSION UNIT SLIDE FASTENER TORQUE
SIZE A ØB SIZE A B ØC SIZE KIT NO. UNIT SIZE SIZE in-lb Nm
RFS114 2.038 2.132 RFS114 1.607 .197 3.823 RFS114 69703 SHP108 x 40 5-40 x 5/8 20 [2.3]
RFS514 [51.8] [54.2] RFS514 [40.8] [5.0] [97.1] RFS514 69706 SHP508 x 40 [ M3 x 0.5 x 16 ] 20 [2.3]
RFS120 2.756 2.792 RFS120 2.107 .039 4.733 RFS120 69704 SHP112 x 40 5-40 x 7/8 20 [2.3]
RFS125 3.696 3.898 RFS125 2.712 .433 5.835 RFS125 69705 SHP116 x 55 6-32 x 1 40 [4.5]
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED DOWEL PINS BLANK TRANSITION PLATE MOUNTING KIT

SERIES GRT SERIES SHP BLANK BLANK TRANSITION REQUIRED
UNIT GRIPPER SLIDE TRANSITION UNIT TRANSITION PLATE FASTENER TORQUE
SIZE PIN SIZE PIN SIZE PLATE PIN SIZE SIZE KIT NO. PLATE NO. SIZE SIZE in-lb Nm
RFS114 Ø 1/8 x 3/8 — Ø 1/8 x 1/2 RFS114 69729 69721-1 .312 x Ø 2.205 5-40 x 3/8 20 [2.3]
RFS514 [Ø 3 x 12] — [Ø 3 x 14] RFS514 69732 69721-5 [7.9 x Ø 56.0] [M3 x 0.5 x 10] 20 [2.3]
RFS120 Ø 3/16 x 5/8 — Ø 3/16 x 3/4 RFS120 69730 69722-1 .433 x Ø 3.346 8-32 x 1/2 40 [4.5]
RFS125 Ø 1/4 x 3/4 — Ø 1/4 x 3/4 RFS125 69731 69723-1 .500 x Ø 3.583 1/4-20 x 5/8 140 [15.8]

ROTARY ACTUATOR SELECTION: SERIES RF
SIZING A SERIES RF UNIT BASED ON
TORQUE OUTPUT AND STOPPING CAPACITY
SIZING SIZING A SERIES RF UNIT BASED ON
A number of factors must be considered when selecting a STOPPING CAPACITY
Series RF Rotary Actuator. These include actuator orientation, total
load attached and rotational speed. The process of selecting the STEP 4
proper Series RF rotary actuator consists of three main steps: Calculate the Peak Velocity (ω)
1) Size the actuator based on the torque requirements This formula estimates the peak velocity of the Series RF in
2) Size the actuator based on stopping capacity operation, and is used to determine the stopping capacity of
3) Size the actuator based on bearing capacity the rotary actuator. The result is given in radians/sec.
Choose the actuator which meets the requirements of your
application. Average Velocity (deg/sec) = Rotational Angle in Degrees
Time of Rotation in Seconds
STEP 1
Determine Rotational Mass Moment of Inertia (Jm)
Select the illustration from the application types on page Peak Velocity = .024 x Average Velocity
3D-40 that most resembles your specific application. Several
separate calculations may be necessary to fully describe your
application. Using the appropriate application equation,
calculate the mass moment of inertia for the type of condition
illustrated. The total mass moment of inertia is the sum of the STEP 5
individual calculations. Compare Peak Velocity (ω) to Allowable Impact
Compare the peak velocity to the maximum allowable
STEP 2 velocity for the given Mass Moment of Inertia (Jm) of your
Determine Necessary Acceleration (αA) application. The chart is labeled Shock Pad Energy
This equation calculates the acceleration necessary to move Capacity. The charts represent the total amount of energy that
through the required angle of rotation in the specified time. The is able to be absorbed and provide acceptable motion of the
results are given in radians/sec2. actuator. Acceptable motion is defined as a maximum of one
degree of motion reversal when the load comes to the end of
.035 x Rotation Angle in Degrees stroke. Note: The unit may be run at slightly higher velocities
Acceleration (rad/sec2) = αA =
(Time of Rotation in Seconds)2 and loads than these charts indicate without damage; however,
the motion profile may be unacceptable. Please contact PHD if
STEP 3 the Series RF Rotary Actuator is to be used outside of the
Calculate the Required Starting Torque (TA) recommended energy range. If the shock pad does not provide
Select the illustration from the application types on page enough stopping capacity for the application, the next larger
3D-40 that most resembles your specific application. Several size of actuator should be considered.
separate calculations may be necessary to fully describe your
application. Using the appropriate application equation,
SHOCK PAD ENERGY CAPACITY
calculate the torque for each for each type of condition
illustrated that matches your application. The total torque will 16.0
be the sum of the individual calculations. Note: Torque

Allowable Impact Velocity (rad/sec)
14.0
calculations are theoretical, an appropriate safety factor
should be considered. PHD recommends a minimum safety 12.0
factor of 2 to account for friction loss, air line and valve size,
10.0
and attached accessories.
8.0
RFSx25
6.0
Starting Torque (in/lb) = TA, TAg RFSx20
Balanced Load TA = Jm x αA x SF 4.0
Unbalanced Load TAg = [(Jm x αA) + (Fg x k)] x SF RFSx14
2.0
0.0
0 0.005 0.01 0.015 0.02
[.00057] [.00113] [.00169] [.00226]
2 2
Attached Load, Moment Of Inertia (in-lb-sec ) [Nm-s ]
3D-37
SIZING A SERIES RF UNIT BASED ON BEARING
CAPACITY
STEP 6
The charts on the next page are divided into two categories.
The charts on the left are used when axial and radial loads are
known. Use these charts to determine if your application is within
the allowable attached load for a specific size. Refer to the proper
charts based on your intended actuator orientation and load. The
charts on the next page are used when the load is defined and the
distance of the center of gravity of the load from the center of
rotation or face of the rotary actuator is known. See the illustration
below.
CG
3D
Horizontal Orientation (in)

(CG)= Distance from Face of Hub to
Center of Gravity of Load
Vertical Orientation (in)

(CG)= Distance from Centerline of Hub
to Center of Gravity of Load
Cg
Using Known Axial and Radial Graphs

If the application is strictly axial the unit can be loaded up to
the maximum shown on the X axis. If there is combined axial and
radial loading, check the known values against the maximum
indicated in the chart. The line in the center is the point where the
axial load is matched to the radial load. This is the maximum load
that can be applied in combined loading applications. Also be aware
that the distance from the face of the hub to the center of gravity is
critical in determining the reaction force back at the bearing. If exact
radial and axial loads are unknown, PHD recommends using the
Load vs. CG Distance charts on the next page.
Using Known Load and Center of Gravity Distance

If there is an unbalanced load, refer to the chart labeled Load
vs. CG Distance, this chart takes into account reactionary forces and
shows the allowable load at a given center of gravity distance.
Check the application against this chart for proper selection.
3D-38
AXIAL VS. RADIAL LOAD LIMITS LOAD VS. CENTER OF GRAVITY DISTANCE
Distance
CG
LOAD
LOAD
LOAD
Axial Load Radial Load

2.35
2.5
[11.12]
[10.45] RFSx14 1.4
[6.23]
1.334
[5.94]
RFSx14
.899
[4.00]
Maximum Radial Load 1.2
[5.34]
2.0
[8.90]
1
Radial Load lb [N]
[4.45]
1.334
Load lb [N]
1.5 [5.94]
[6.67] 0.8
[3.56]
Combined Maximum Load 0.6

1.0 [2.67]
[4.45] Maximum Axial
Load
1.96 0.4
[8.72] [1.78]
0.50
[2.22] 0.2
[0.89]
0 0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4
[0.89] [1.78] [2.67] [3.56] [4.45] [5.34] [6.23] [7.12] [8.01] [8.90] [5.08] [10.16] [15.24] [20.32] [25.4] [30.48] [35.56]
Axial Load lb [N] Center of Gravity Distance in [mm]
5.0
[22.24]
4.55
[20.24] RFSx20 3
[13.35]
RFSx20
1.799 2.59
4.5 [11.52]
[20.02] [8.00]
Maximum Radial Load 2.5
4.0 [11.12]
[17.79]
Radial Load lb [N]
3.5
[15.57] 2
Load lb [N]
2.59 [8.90]
3.0 [11.52]
[13.35]
2.5 1.5
[11.12] [6.67]
Combined Maximum Load
2.0
[8.90]
Maximum Axial Load 1
1.5 3.79 [4.45]
[6.67] [16.86]
1.0
[4.45] 0.5
[2.22]
0.50
[2.22]
0 0
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5
[2.22] [4.45] [6.67] [8.90] [11.12] [13.35] [15.57] [17.79] [12.7] [25.4] [38.1] [50.8] [63.5]
7.60
8
[33.81] RFSx25 4.5
[20.02]
4.32
[19.22]
RFSx25
[35.59] 2.811
[12.50] 4
7 [17.79]
[31.14] Maximum Radial Load
3.5
6 [15.57]
[26.69]
Radial Load lb [N]
4.32 3
Load lb [N]
5 [19.22] [13.35]
[22.24]
2.5
4 [11.12]
[17.79]
2
Combined Maximum Load [8.90]
3
[13.35] Maximum Axial Load 1.5
6.33 [6.67]
2 [28.16]
[8.90] 1
[4.45]
1 0.5
[4.45] [2.22]
0 0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5
[4.45] [8.90] [13.35] [17.79] [22.24] [26.69] [31.14] [12.7] [25.4] [38.1] [50.8] [63.5] [76.2] [88.9] [101.6] [114.3]
3D-39
IMPERIAL UNITS:
SF = Safety Factor
METRIC UNITS:
T = Torque required to rotate load (N-m) α = Acceleration (rad/sec )
2
t = time (sec)
BALANCED LOADS
T = Jm x α x SF
3D
L
k
k k
2
Jm = Fg x k 2 Fg
2
Fg 1
g 2 Jm =
g
x
4
x ( L3 + k ) 2
Jm =
5
x
g
x k2

k dim is
radius
b of rod
(with gravity)
a a
2 2 2 2
(without gravity)

T = Jm x α x SF 2
T = Jm x α x SF
Mounted off center Mounted off center
Fg2 Fg2
c
k dim is
radius
of rod
b b
k
Fg a
Fg1 a Fg1
Fg 2 2
Fg2 (4b2 + 3k2)
(Fg
2 2 2 2
Jm =
g
x k2 Jm = Fg1 x 4a + c + Fg2 x 4b + c
g 12 g 12
Jm =
g1
x (4a + 3k ) +
12 g )(
x
12
)
3D-40
SIZING EXAMPLE: SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATOR
APPLICATION INFORMATION - EXAMPLE 1 CG
Weight = .75 lb + .25 lb Plate
Rotation Angle = 180° 1.125"
Pressure = 65 psi
Orientation = Vertical .75 lb
Center of Gravity Distance = 1.125" for .75 lb .5"
.5" for .25 lb .25 lb
Desired Cycle Rate = .35 sec
Safety Factor = 2
Axial Load = .75 lb + .25 lb 2"
EXAMPLE 1
STEP 1
STEP 4
Determine Jm of Plate mounted off center
Calculate Peak Velocity
Fg1 4a2 + c2 Fg2 4b2 + c2 180
Jm = x + x Average Velocity = = 514.28 deg/sec
g 12 g 12 .35
.083 4(1)2 + (2)2 .167 4(2)2 + (2)2 Peak Velocity = .024 x Average Velocity(rad/sec)
x + x
386.4 12 386.4 12
Peak Velocity = .024 x 514.28 = 12.34 rad/sec
(.0002148 x .6667) + (.000432195 x 1.6667) STEP 5
.000143 + .000720326 Compare the Peak Velocity
Compare this value to the Shock Pad Energy Capacity chart on

Jm = .0008633 in-lb-sec2 page 11. We see the following:
Determine Point Load • The size 14 will not handle the Jm value.
Fg
Jm = x K2
g • The size 20 will not attain the speed required.
.75
Jm = x (1.125)2 • The size 25 will perform the task in the desired time.
386.4
Jm = .0019409 x 1.2656 STEP 6

Determine the bearing capabilities of a Size 25
Jm = .002456 in-lb-sec2 Since we know the axial loading but not the radial loading for
this application, we compare it to the Load vs. CG Distance Chart on
page 3D-39.
Jm Total = .00086 + .00245 = .00331 in-lb-sec2 At this loading condition the size 25 has the capability of 1 lb at
STEP 2 around 2.2 inches off center. Our application is at 1.125 inches.
Determine Acceleration
.035 x Rotation Angle in Degrees Therefore; the RFSx25 is suitable for this application.
Acceleration (rad/sec2) = αA =
180
αA = .035 x
(.35)2
αA = 51.429 rad/sec2
STEP 3
Starting Torque
T = Jm x αA x SF
T = .00331 x 51.429 x 2
T = .3405 in-lb
3D-41
Weight = 1.5 lb
Pressure = 60 psi
Orientation = Horizontal
1"
Center of Gravity Distance = .5"
Desired Cycle Rate = .5 sec
Safety Factor = 2
Axial Load = Ø
Cycles per minute = 20
2.60 Ø
EXAMPLE 2
STEP 1 STEP 5
Determine Jm Compare the Peak Velocity
(Equation is from page 14, Disk Mounted on Center)
Check this value against the Shock Pad Energy Capacity chart
Fg K2
Jm = x on page 3D-37.
3D
g 2
1.5 (1.3)2 • The size 14 cannot handle the Jm value of .0038. The size 14
Jm = x
386.4 2 cannot stop the load.
Jm = .00328 in-lb-sec2 • The size 20 can stop the load and perform the task in the
required time.
STEP 2
STEP 6
Determining the bearing capabilities of a Size 20.
.035 x Rotation Angle in Degrees
Acceleration (rad/sec2) = αA = We now check the loading condition against the Load vs. CG
Distance chart for the size 20 on page 3D-39.
180
αA = .035 x We see that a size 20 can handle approximately 2 lbs at
(.5)2
.5 inches from center of gravity distance.
αA = 25.2 rad/sec2 Therefore; the RFSx20 is suitable for this application.
STEP 3
Starting Torque
(Equation is from page 14)
T = Jm x αA x SF
T = .00328 x 25.2 x 2
T = .165 in-lb
STEP 4
180
Average Velocity = = 360 degrees/sec
.5
Peak Velocity = .024 x Average Velocity (rad/sec)
Peak Velocity = .024 x 360 = 8.64 rad/sec
3D-42
Weight = 1.75 lb
2.80 Ø 1"
Pressure = 80 psi
Orientation = Vertical
Center of Gravity Distance = Ø
Desired Cycle Rate = 1.0 sec
Safety Factor = 2
Axial Load = 1.75 lb (weight)
Cycles per minute = 30
EXAMPLE 3
STEP 1 STEP 5
Determine Jm Compare the Peak Velocity
(Equation is from page 14, Disk Mounted on Center)
Fg K2 Compare this value to the Shock Pad Energy Capacity chart on
Jm = x page 11.
g 2
1.75 (1.4)2 • The size 14 will handle the Jm value at the rated Peak
Jm = x
386.4 2 Velocity.
Jm = .0044 in-lb-sec2 STEP 6

Determine the bearing capabilities of size 14.
STEP 2
Use the Axial vs. Radial Load Limits chart for the RFSx14 on
.035 x Rotation Angle in Degrees page 3D-39.
Acceleration (rad/sec ) = αA =
2
Since we have only an axial load we can support
180 up to 1.96 lb.
αA = .035 x
(1.0)2
Therefore; the Series RFSx14 is suitable for this application.
αA = 6.3 rad/sec 2
STEP 3
Starting Torque
(Equation is from page 3D-40)
T = Jm x αA x SF
T = .0044 x 6.3 x 2
T = .055 in/lb
STEP 4
180
Average Velocity = = 180 degrees/sec
1.0
Peak Velocity = .024 x Average Velocity (rad/sec)
Peak Velocity = .024 x 180 = 4.32 rad/sec
3D-43

Rotary Actuators - PHD

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Rotary Actuators - PHD

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

INDEX:

ROTARY ACTUATORS Series RL

SERIES RL, RA, RI, RF, MINIATURE, Series RA

SERIES RF Plumbing Schematics

PHD Series RL Rotary Actuators cover a wide range of sizes

SERIES RA ROTARY ACTUATORS

PHD Series RA Rotary Actuators have zero backlash at ends of

rotation providing precise rotary positioning. Large shafts, bearings,

MINIATURE ROTARY ACTUATORS

PHD Miniature Rotary Actuators are lightweight, compact

Series 1000-8000 Rotary Actuators are a rugged line for

Air/Oil Tandem Rotary Actuators provide the smooth control

Multi-Position Rotary Actuators can yield three, four, or five

SERIES RI ROTARY ACTUATORS

Series RI Rotary Actuators incorporate internal air passages

SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATORS

Series RF Rotary Actuators feature a low profile body design

■ Series RL Rotary Actuators provide a very high torque to

■ Free-floating pistons with pressure and wear compensating

■ Acetal pistons and rack bearings eliminate metal-to-metal

■ Sealed ball bearings provide smooth operation and reliability.

3A-4 All dimensions are reference only unless specifically toleranced.

BORE SIZE NOMINAL ROTATION A B C D E EE F G PORT H

BORE SIZE J K L M N P [h8] Q QA R T U

Numbers in [ ] are for metric units and are in mm.

All dimensions are reference only unless specifically toleranced. 3A-5

PRESSURE AND BREAKAWAY RATINGS BEARING LOADS TABLE

They are for pneumatic application only.

45° ANGLE ADJUSTMENT

45° ANGLE ADJUSTMENT

Angle adjustment screws each allow the nominal angle of T

NOTE: Angle adjustment options are not available with cushion

ANGLE ADJUSTMENT SCREW

BORE SIZE NOMINAL ROTATION E EE F G T V Y

SHOCK PAD INSTALLED

SHOCK PAD INSTALLED

SHOCK PAD INSTALLED

NOTE: Shock pad options are not available on 12 mm units, or

3A-8 All dimensions are reference only unless specifically toleranced.

CUSHION COUNTERCLOCKWISE CUSHION CLOCKWISE

DW CUSHION CLOCKWISE DIRECTION

PHD Cushions allow smooth deceleration at the end of rotation.

effective cushion length is approximately 40° at the end of full

NOTE: Cushion options are not available with angle adjustment,

BORE SIZE NOMINAL ROTATION E EE F G T

This option provides mounting holes on the back side

All dimensions are reference only unless specifically toleranced. 3A-9

PART NO. COLOR DESCRIPTION

MAGNETS FOR PHD MINIATURE

PART NO. COLOR DESCRIPTION

MAGNETS FOR PHD MINIATURE

PHD Series 5360 Miniature Hall Effect, Reed, and

PART NO. COLOR DESCRIPTION

3A-10 All dimensions are reference only unless specifically toleranced.

SHOCK ABSORBER INSTALLED

Hydraulic shock absorbers provide optimum control of SHOCK ABSORBER

NOTE: The shock absorber also provides the rotation

SHOCK ABSORBER READY

SHOCK ABSORBER SPECIFICATIONS

All dimensions are reference only unless specifically toleranced. 3A-11

Q13 DOUBLE SHAFT EXTENSION BORE SIZE P [h8]

[20.0] [44.5] [6.0 SQ x 30.0]